Owner’s Manual Owner’s and Maintenance Safety Operation, ASTRA

ASTRA TS 1612-A-07 ©Copyright by Ltd., England. Ltd., ©Copyright Motors Vauxhall by or Reproduction or in whole translation, in parts, is not withoutpermitted prior consent written Motors Vauxhall from Ltd. under rights as understood All the copyright explicitly are laws Ltd. Motors Vauxhall reserved by and specifications contained in this illustrations information, All based on the latest are manual information production atavailable the time of publication. The right changes at make is reserved to time without any notice. July Edition: 2006.

Operation, Safety, Maintenance -2

Data specific to your vehicle Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it easily accessible. This information is available under the section "Technical data" as well as on the identification plate. Fuel Designation

Engine oil Grade

Viscosity

Tyre inflation pressure Tyre size with full load Summer tyres Front Rear

Winter tyres Front Rear

Weights Permissible gross vehicle weight

– EC kerb weight

=Loading -1

Your Astra Make use of the Owner's Manual: This symbol signifies: Developed to the latest findings of z Its "In Brief" section give you an initial 6 Continue reading on next page. automobile research, it offers technical overview. 3 The asterisk signifies equipment not sophistication and exceptional comfort. z The table of contents at the start of the fitted to all vehicles (model variants, Your vehicle represents an intelligent Owner’s Manual and in each individual engine options, models specific to one synthesis of advanced technology, chapter will help you find your way. country, optional equipment, Genuine z outstanding safety, environmental Its index will help you find what you Vauxhall Parts and Accessories). compatibility and economy. want. z It will familiarise you with the 9 Warning It now lies with you to drive your vehicle sophisticated technology. safely and to see it performs perfectly. z It will increase your pleasure in your 9 Warning is used to mark text This Owner's Manual provides you with all vehicle. regarding possible risks of accident or the necessary information to that end. z It will help you to handle your vehicle injury. Failure to follow the instructions Make sure your passengers are aware of expertly. could lead to injury or loss of life. the possible risk of accident and injury The Owner’s Manual is designed to be Inform vehicle passengers accordingly. which may result from improper use of the clearly laid-out and easily understood. vehicle. Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as You must always comply with the laws of points of reference or indicate some action the country in which you are travelling. to be performed. These could differ from the information in Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a this Owner’s Manual. reaction or a second action to be The Owner's Manual should always be kept performed. in the vehicle: ready to hand in the glove Thank you for choosing a Vauxhall. We compartment. wish you many hours of pleasurable driving.

Your Vauxhall Team 0 Commitment to customer In Brief ...... 2 Contents satisfaction: Instruments ...... 36 Our aim: to keep you happy with your Keys, doors, vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers bonnet ...... 66 offer first class service at competitive Seats, Interior ...... 87 prices. Experienced, factory-trained Safety systems ...... 111 technicians work according to factory Lighting ...... 136 instructions.Your Authorised Repairer can Windows, Sun Roof ...... 143 supply you with GENUINE VAUXHALL- APPROVED PARTS, which have undergone TwinTop ...... 148 stringent quality and precision checks, and Climate control ...... 157 of course useful and attractive ...... 178 VAUXHALL-APPROVED ACCESSORIES. Automatic ...... 186 Our name is your guarantee! For details of the with ActiveSelect ...... 192 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer Network Driving hints ...... 200 please ring this number; 01582 - 427200 Saving fuel, Protecting the environment ...... 202 Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling ...... 204 Catalytic converter, exhaust gases .... 207 Drive Control Systems ...... 212 Brakes ...... 226 Wheels, tyres ...... 230 Roof racks, Caravan and trailer towing ...... 238 Self-help ...... 247 If you have a problem ...... 294 Maintenance, Inspection System ...... 296 Vehicle care ...... 308 Technical Data ...... 312 Index...... 349 2In Brief In Brief

Key numbers, To unlock and open the vehicle: Code numbers Press button q, Remove key number from keys. pull door handle The key number is specified in the vehicle In vehicles with an Open&Start system 3, documents and in the Car Pass 3. the vehicle is unlocked automatically by pulling a door handle or by pulling the Alloy wheels 3, towing equipment 3: make button beneath the rear door handle if the a note of the key identifier codes. electronic key is in the external reception Electronic immobiliser, infotainment range of the vehicle. system 3: The code numbers are specified 6 Child safety locks – page 86, in the Car Pass. electronic immobiliser – page 67, Do not keep the Car Pass in the vehicle. keys – page 66, Open&Start system 3 – page 70, 3 For key with retractable key blade , press radio remote control – page 68, button to extend. central locking system – page 76, 6 Further information – pages 66, 67, anti-theft locking system 3 – page 77, vehicle recommissioning – page 307. Vauxhall alarm system 3 – page 83, TwinTop roof operation 3 – page 148. In Brief 3

To unlock and To adjust front seat: Adjust front seat backrest: open the luggage compartment: Pull handle, Turn handwheel Press button q on remote slide seat, Move backrest to suit seating position. control and release handle Do not lean on seat backrest whilst pull button beneath Never adjust the seat while driving. It could adjusting it. handle move in an uncontrolled manner when the 6 Seat position – page 87. In vehicles with Open&Start system 3 the handle is pulled. tailgate is unlocked automatically by 6 Seat position – page 87. pulling the button beneath the handle if the electronic key is within the external 9 Warning reception range of the vehicle. The doors are also unlocked. Do not sit nearer than 10 inches (25cm) 6 Open&Start-System 3 – Page 70, from the steering wheel, to permit safe Radio remote control – Page 68, airbag deployment. Central locking system – Page 76, Vauxhall alarm system 3 – Page 83. 4In Brief

To adjust front seat lumbar To adjust front seat height 3: To adjust front seat inclination 3: support 3: Operate lever on outboard side of Pull inner lever on front of seat, Turn handwheel seat adjust inclination, Adjust lumbar support to suit personal Lever pumping action release lever, requirements. upward: seat higher engage seat in position Do not lean on seat backrest whilst downward: seat lower Adjust the inclination by distributing body adjusting it. 6 Seat position – page 87. weight. 6 Seat position – page 87. 6 Seat position – page 87. In Brief 5

Tip the front seat backs To adjust thigh support 3 To adjust head forward 3: of the front sport seat 3: restraint height of front Lift release lever, tilt seat back Press button in recessed handle and rear outboard seats: forward, at the front of the adjustment Press button to release, lower release lever, seat back is cushion and adjust the adjust height, engaged in tilted position, slide thigh support engage in position seat forwards Adjust thigh support to suit personal 6 Head restraint position – Page 88, To straighten the seat, slide back and it requirements. Adjusting rear centre head restraint engages in its original position. Raise – Page 89, release lever, straighten seat back, lower Removing the head restraint – Page 88. release lever, seat back engages. For seats without memory function 3: engage seat in desired position. The seat back can only be tipped forwards from an upright position. Panoramic windscreen 3: before folding the seat, push the head restraints down and close the sun visors. 6In Brief

Adjusting interior mirror: To adjust exterior mirrors: Electrical exterior mirrors 3, Swivel mirror housing From inside, swivel lever adjust: Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing in required direction Four-way switch in driver’s door to reduce dazzle at night. 6 Further information, aspherical exterior Press mirror switch right or left: Four-way 6 Automatic anti-dazzle mirror 3 – page 134. switch adjusts corresponding mirror. interior mirror – page 134. 6 Further information, aspherical exterior mirror – page 134, heated exterior mirrors – page 18. In Brief 7

Swing in exterior mirror: Fitting : Steering wheel adjustment: Manual: Mirrors can be folded in under Draw seat belt smoothly from Move lever down, light pressure. inertia adjust height and distance, Electrically 3 : Press n and both mirrors will reel, move lever up, swing in. guide over shoulder engage Press button n again - both exterior and engage in buckle Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is mirrors swivel to the driving position. The seat belt must not be twisted at any stationary and steering column lock is point. The lap belt must lie snugly against released. If an electrical retracted mirror is extended the body. The front seat backrests must not 6 manually, pressing button n will cause the Vauxhall Full Size Airbag System be tilted back too far (recommended tilting – Page 117. mirror to move all the way forward. The angle approx. 25 °). other mirror will be eclectically swiveled to the driving position. If button n is pressed To release belt, press red button on belt again, both mirrors will be electrically buckle. retracted. Press again: both mirrors swivel 6 Three-point seat belts – Page 112, to the driving position. Vauxhall Full Size Airbag System – Page 117, Seat position – Page 87. 8In Brief In Brief 9

Page Page Page 1 Side air vents ...... 159 6 Turn signal lights, headlight flash 13 Starter switch 2 Front passenger airbag ...... 117 Dipped beam, main beam ...... 15 with immobiliser ...... 14 Door-to-door light function 3...... 140 and 3 Centre air vents ...... 159 Parking lights 3 ...... 140 sensor panel for emergency operation 4 Central information display for Cruise control 3 ...... 13, 216 Open&Start system 3 ...... 73 time, date, outside temperature, 7 Remote control on 14 Accelerator pedal...... 200, 201 infotainment system 3 , steering wheel 3 ...... 64 check control 3 ...... 62 15 Brake pedal ...... 201, 226, 227 Trip computer 3 ...... 52, 58 8 Instruments ...... 36 16 Clutch pedal 3...... 201 3 Climate control system ...... 171 9 Horn ...... 16 17 Steering wheel adjustment ...... 7 3 Driver’s Airbag ...... 117 5 Heated seat (left) ...... 160 18 Start/stop button 3 ...... 22, 70 Deflation 10 , detection system 3 ...... 221 windscreen wash system, 19 Ashtray 3 ...... 108 Tyre pressure headlight wash system 3 and Cigarette lighter 3 ...... 107 monitoring system 3 ...... 222 rear window wash system ...... 17, 18 20 Climate control ...... 157 Parking distance sensor 3 ...... 218 11 Parking lights, dipped beam ...... 140 21 Infotainment system 3 ...... 65 Hazard warning lights ...... 16 Instrument illumination ...... 140 Central locking system ...... 76 Fog tail light ...... 137 22 Glove compartment ...... 72, 110, 159 3 SPORT mode ...... 214 Fog lights 3 ...... 137 3 Heated seat (right) ...... 160 Headlight range adjustment 3 .... 138 12 Bonnet release lever ...... 86 10 In Brief

Door open Control indicators Q S Engine oil level 3 see page 39. 0 Open&Start system see pages 40, 298. see pages 36, 70. p Alternator 8 Exterior lights see page 39. I Engine oil pressure see pages 40, 136. see page 37. W Coolant temperature r Parking distance sensor 3 see pages 39, 300. R Brake system, see page 218. clutch system A Engine electronics, see pages 38, 226, 302. O Turn signal lights Gear electronics 3, see pages 15, 40. v Airbag systems, Immobiliser 3 belt tensioners, Diesel fuel filter , Y Fuel level deployable anti-roll bar 3 fault see pages 40, 43, 205. see pages 113, 123, 132. see pages 39, 67, 184, 190, 198, 210. > Fog lights 3 v Electronic see pages 41, 137. Stability Programme j Easytronic 3 , (ESP®Plus ) 3 start engine 3 C Main beam see page 212. see pages 39, 179. see pages 15, 41.

X Seat belt 3 IDS+ Continuous r Fog tail light see pages 38, 115. Damping Control 3, see pages 41, 137. SPORT mode 3 see pages 214, 215. In Brief 11

T Winter programme of u Anti-lock brake system Lighting automatic transmission 3 see page 229. Light switch, or Easytronic 3 stalk positions see pages 182, 189, 196. ! Preheating system 3, see pages 14, 136, 3 Diesel particle filter 7 Lights off, 1 SPORT mode of see page 42. automatic transmission 3 8 Parking lights, or Easytronic 3 w Deflation 9 Dipped beam, main beam see pages 181, 188, 195. detection system 3, Tyre pressure monitoring > Fog lights 3 y Seat occupancy recognition 3 system 3 see page 137. see page 124. see pages 42, 221, 224. r Fog tail light Z Exhaust emission 3 B Adaptive headlights 3, see page 137. see pages 41, 209. Fault see pages 139, 142. C Main beam see page 15. m Cruise control 3 see pages 13, 216. O Turn signal lights see page 15.

k Instrument illumination see page 140.

c Courtesy lights see page 141.

a Reading lights 3 see page 141.

¨ Hazard warning lights see page 16. 12 In Brief

Climate control n Air conditioning system 3 Sun roof 3 Air distribution see pages 19, 164, 168. ü Sun roof: see pages 161, 175, opening or tilting – see page 147. 3 L to head area via adjustable 4 Air recirculation system d Sun roof: air vents and to foot well, see pages 164, 168, 176. closing – see page 147. M to head area via AUTO Automatic mode 3 adjustable air vents, see pages 19, 172. G Sunblind: opening – see page 147. l to windscreen, V Demisting and defrosting 3 Sunblind: J to windscreen and see pages 19, 163, 166, 174. H closing – see page 147. to foot well, ß Heated seats 3 K to foot well. see page 160. Windscreen wiper x Stalk positions– Air flow Astra TwinTop 3 see pages 17, 18 see pages 161, 175. > Open roof § Off, see page 149. A Automatic control $ Timed interval wipe, or of fan speed 3 < Close roof automatic wipe see page 168. see page 149. with rain sensor 3, Ü Heated rear window % Slow " Central switch see pages 18, 160. window operation, & Fast opening see page 144.

" Central switch window operation, closing see page 144. In Brief 13

Cruise control 3 Miscellaneous E Deflation Buttons on turn signal stalk p Central locking system: detection system 3, see pages 16, 216. locking – see page 76. Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 m Activate, store, q Central locking system: see pages 221, 222. accelerate, unlocking – see page 76. g Resume r Parking distance sensor 3 stored speed, m Central locking button, see page 218. decelerate, see page 78. 3 § SPORT SPORT mode Deactivate. b Vauxhall alarm system 3 see page 214. see page 83. Information display, T Winter programme, infotainment system 0 Emergency operation Easytronic 3, Information display Open&Start system Automatic transmission 3 see page 46. see page 73. see pages 182, 189, 196. Ö On button for date z Child safety system j Horn and time, see page 48, for rear windows 3 see page 16. ; Date and time setting button, see page 144. See page 48. + First-aid kit (cushion) 3 see page 252. Remote control on steering wheel 3, ¨ Warning triangle 3 see pages 49, 64. see page 252. 14 In Brief

Steering wheel lock and ignition: Steering wheel lock and ignition Light switch: Turn key to position 1. on vehicles with Open&Start 7 =Off Move steering wheel slightly system 3: 8 = Parking lights to release lock Make sure electronic key 9 = Dipped or Positions: is in the interior reception main beam 0 = Ignition off range and press the Start/Stop AUTO = Automatic dipped 1 = Steering released, ignition off button. beam activation 3 2 = Ignition on, Release steering column lock by Press button: with : preheating moving the steering wheel > 3 3=Start = Fog lights slightly. r = Rear fog lights To lock the steering wheel, switch ignition To start the vehicle, also operate brake or 6 Lighting - Page 136, off, remove key and engage steering clutch pedal. Headlight control indicator – Page 23. wheel. To lock the steering wheel, switch ignition 6 Starting – page 22, off by pressing the Start/Stop button, open electronic immobiliser – page 67, driver’s door and engage steering wheel. parking the vehicle – page 24. Do not allow vehicle to move whilst doing this. 6 Starting – page 22, electronic immobiliser – page 67, parking the vehicle – page 24. In Brief 15

Dipped and main beam switch: Headlight flash: To operate turn signal lights: Main beam = Push stalk Pull stalk towards steering wheel Right = Move stalk up forward The main beam is switched on while Left = Move stalk down Dipped beam = Push stalk activated. After operation, the turn signal stalk forward again returns to its starting position. or pull toward If the stalk is moved past the resistance steering wheel point, the turn signal light remains on. The blue control indicator C is illuminated When the steering wheel moves back when main beam is on. toward the straight-ahead position, the turn signal light is automatically deactivated. Tap signal: Move stalk to resistance point and release to activate three flashes from the turn signals when changing lanes or the like. Move the stalk to the resistance point and hold for the turn signals to flash longer. Switch the turn signal off manually by moving the stalk slightly. 16 In Brief

Cruise control operation 3: Hazard warning lights: Activate horn: Press button on stalk On = Press ¨ Press j in centre of steering Switch on: briefly press button m. Off = Press ¨ again wheel Switch off: briefly press button §. To aid location of the pushbutton, the red surface is illuminated when the ignition 6 Vauxhall Full Size Airbag System Resume at stored speed: switched on. When the button is pressed, – Page117, briefly press button g. its control indicator flashes in time with the Remote control on steering wheel 3 6 Cruise control 3 – page 216. hazard warning lights. – Page 64. In Brief 17

Windscreen wiper: Windscreen wiper: Automatic wiping with Move lever upward adjustable wiper interval 3 rain sensor 3: § = Off To set the wiper interval to a value between Move stalk upward $ = Timed interval wipe 2 and 15 seconds: $ = Automatic wiping % = Slow Switch on ignition. with rain sensor & = Fast Press lever down from position §. Automatic wiping $ : The rain sensor Lever always moves back to starting Wait the desired interval. detects the amount of water on the $ position. Shift to next higher or lower level: Set the lever to timed interval wipe . windscreen and automatically regulates move lever slightly. The interval time selected remains stored the windscreen wiper. Push lever past resistance point and hold: until it is next changed or the ignition is To switch off, move stalk downwards turned off. the windscreen wiper stages are run 6 Further information – pages 303, 310. through; an acoustic signal sounds at After turning on the ignition and setting the position §. lever to $ , the interval is set to 6 seconds. Press lever down from position §: Single swipe. 6 Further information – pages 303, 310. 18 In Brief

Operating windscreen and Activate rear wiper 3 and Heated rear window, headlight wash systems 3: wash 3: heated exterior mirrors: Pull stalk towards steering wheel Wiper on = Stalk On = Press Ü The wiper swipes for a few strokes. At low forwards Off = Press Ü again speeds, there is a single post-wash swipe. Wiper off = Stalk forwards Heating operational only with engine The headlight wash system 3 can be again running. operated when the lights are on. Wash Wash = Hold stalk The rear window and exterior mirror fluid is sprayed on the headlights. The fully heating is switched off automatically after headlight wash system cannot be forwards approx. 15 minutes. operated for 2 minutes thereafter. The rear window wiper swipes in timed 6 Air conditioning– Page157, On vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3, keep interval mode. Heated rear window– Page160. the sensor area clean. The rear window wiper engages 6 Further information – pages 303, 310. automatically when the windscreen wiper is switched on and reverse gear is engaged. 6 Further information – pages 303, 310. In Brief 19

Range 257 miles

Inst. consumpt. 7.6 miles/gal

19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19:36

To demist or defrost Set automatic mode on Information display 3 : windows: climate control system 3: provides information: Set air distribution to l, Press AUTO, –Time, rotary switch for temperature preselect temperature – outside temperature, and air flow clockwise; with rotary knob, –radio3 and date, Air conditioning system 3: open air vents – navigation 3, 3 also press button n; 6 Climate control system 3 – page 171. – telephone , Automatic air conditioning – check control 3, –trip computer3 , 3 system : – climate control system 3. press button n and v, turn rotary switch for 6 Information Display 3 – page 46. temperature clockwise, air flow to A; Climate control system 3: press button V Open air vents and direct the side air vents toward the door windows. 6 Climate control system 3 – page157. 20 In Brief

Manual transmission: Easytronic 3 : Automatic transmission 3 : Reverse: with the vehicle stationary, wait 3 N = Idle P = Park seconds after declutching and then pull up o =Drive position R = Reverse the button on the selector lever and + = higher gear N = Neutral (idle) engage the gear. - =lower gear D = Automatic gear selection If the gear does not engage, set the lever in A = Change between 3 = 1st to 3rd gear neutral, release the clutch pedal and Automatic and 2 = 1st and 2nd gear depress again; then repeat gear selection. Manual mode 1 = 1st gear R = Reverse Starting only possible in P or N . To move (with selector lever lock) from P, switch on ignition, depress foot The selector lever must always be moved in brake and press button on selector lever. the appropriate direction as far as it will Press button on selector lever to engage P go. Upon release, it automatically returns or R. to the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/mode indicator in the transmission P: Only with vehicle stationary, first display. apply hand brake R: Only with vehicle stationary The foot brake must be depressed when 6 3 starting. Automatic transmission – page 186. 6 Easytronic 3 – Page 178. In Brief 21

To select P or R, press button on selector lever. P: Only with vehicle stationary, first apply hand brake R: Only with vehicle stationary 6 Automatic transmission with 3 – page 192.

Automatic transmission Exhaust gases are poisonous with ActiveSelect3 : Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, P = Park which is extremely poisonous but is R = Reverse gear odourless and colourless. N = Neutral (idle) Therefore never inhale exhaust gases, and D = Automatic gear selection never run the engine in an enclosed space. Selector lever in D to left: Avoid driving with an open luggage Manual mode compartment. Otherwise, exhaust gases + = Higher gear or stage could penetrate the interior. - = Lower gear 6 Catalytic converter, exhaust – Page 207 or stage P or N must be engaged when starting. To move from P or N, switch on ignition, depress foot brake and press button on selector lever. 22 In Brief

Before starting off, check: z Tyre pressure and tyre condition – pages 232, 333. z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine compartment – see pages 297 to 305. z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting and number plates are free from dirt, snow and ice and operational. z Do not place any objects in front of the rear window, on the instrument panel or in the area in which the airbags inflate. z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are correctly adjusted. To start engine: To start engine z Check brakes. Operate clutch and brake, with Open&Start system 3: automatic transmission 3 in P or The electronic key must be N, inside the car, Easytronic 3 : Depress brake, do not accelerate, operate clutch or brake, : Turn key to 3; Automatic transmission 3 in P or Diesel engine: Turn key to 2, N, when control indicator ! goes Easytronic 3 : Depress brake, out 1) do not accelerate, turn key to 3; Petrol engine: Press button; release key Diesel engine: Briefly press once engine is running button; when control indicator ! 1) Before restarting or switching off the goes out press button again for engine, turn key back to 0. 1 second; To switch on the ignition, only turn key to 2. release button once engine is running 6 Electronic immobiliser – Page 67, Diesel fuel system – Page 247. Press button again to repeat the starting procedure or switch off the engine.

1) Preheating system switches on only if outside temperature is low. In Brief 23

To turn on the ignition, do not press the Warning buzzers brake or clutch pedal; just press the button When starting the engine or whilst driving: briefly. z if the electronic key of the Open&Start Do not start unless vehicle is stationary. system3 is not present or is not recognised, 6 Open&Start-System 3 – Page 70, Electronic immobilizer – Page 67, z if seat belt is not fastened 3, Diesel fuel system – Page 247. z if a door or the tailgate is ajar, z once you have reached a certain speed if the hand brake is applied 3, z if a specified maximum speed is exceeded 3. z for Easytronic 3 - if A, M or R is selected Releasing the hand brake: while the engine is running and the Raise lever slightly, driver’s door is opened but the foot Press lock button, brake is not depressed. Lower lever fully When the vehicle is parked and the driver’s To reduce operating forces, depress foot door is opened: z 3 brake at the same time. when the key is in the starter switch , z And now "Have a good journey!" with parking lights or dipped beam on, z 3 Drive carefully, economically and with the with Open&Start system and environment in mind. While driving, do not automatic transmission if the selector do anything that could distract you. lever is not in P z with Easytronic 3 – if the hand brake is not applied and no gear is engaged when the engine is off. 24 In Brief

Indicator and warning buzzers z Continuous warning buzzer during roof for Astra TwinTop 3: operation if the anti-roll bars 3 have z Indicator buzzer upon completed been triggered. opening or closing of the z Continuous warning buzzer starting one hardtop. minute before the end of the 9-minute z Indicator buzzer upon completed raising standby time with the roof in an or lowering of the electric luggage intermediate position. compartment loading aid. z Continuous warning buzzer starting one z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed minute before the end of the 9-minute during roof operation. standby time with the loading aid in a z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully raised position. opening during operation of the luggage z Persistent warning buzzer when closing compartment loading aid. the luggage compartment lid, if the z Gong tone during roof operation if lowering process of the electric load aid Parking the vehicle: vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph is not complete or has been interrupted. apply hand brake firmly, (30 km/h). engine off, z Gong tone when vehicle speed exceeds ignition off, 20 mph (30 km/h) if the roof is not fully lock steering wheel, open or closed. lock vehicle z Three gong tones during roof or loading To lock, press p button or with aid operation if the luggage Open&Start system 3 touch sensor in one compartment blind is not attached. of the front door handles. z Three gong tones during roof operation With Open&Start system 3, the driver’s if outside temperature is below –20 °C, door must be opened to lock the steering vehicle battery voltage is too low or the wheel. system is overloaded. In Brief 25

To activate the anti-theft locking system 3 Advice when parking: z On vehicles with Easytronic 3 control and the Vauxhall alarm system 3 press z Do not park the vehicle on an easy indicator R flashes for a few seconds button p twice or with Open&Start system flammable surface. The high after the ignition is switched off if the 3 touch sensor in one of the front door temperature of the exhaust system could hand brake has not been applied handles twice. ignite the surface. – page 184. 6 Further information – pages 67, 200, z Always apply the hand brake firmly. z With the Open&Start system 3 the Open&Start system – page 70, Apply the hand brake as firmly as engine can only be switched off when the radio remote control – page 68, possible on uphill or downhill slopes. To car is stationary. central locking system – page 76, reduce operating forces, depress foot z Turn steering wheel until the steering 3 Vauxhall alarm system – page 83, brake at the same time. lock perceptibly engages (theft vehicle decommissioning – page 307, protection) after first withdrawing the TwinTop roof operation 3 – page 148. z Close the windows and sun roof 3 or TwinTop. ignition key; for Open&Start-System 3 switch off ignition and open driver’s z For , select first or door. reverse; for automatic transmission 3 move selector lever to P , for z The engine cooling fans may run after Easytronic 3 select first or reverse before the engine has been switched off switching off the ignition (note gear see page 297. display, see pages 178, 186, 193). 6 Further information – pages 306, 307. z On vehicles with automatic transmission 3 the key can only be withdrawn when the selector lever is in position P. On the Open&Start system 3, "P" flashes in the gear display for a few seconds if P is not engaged or the handbrake is not applied. 26 In Brief

Genuine Vauxhall Parts and "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" Accessories and conversion parts approved by We recommend that you use "Genuine Vauxhall can be obtained from your Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can conversion parts expressly approved for provide comprehensive advice about your vehicle type. These parts have permissible technical changes and ensure undergone special tests to establish their that the part is installed correctly. reliability, safety and specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous 9 Warning market monitoring, we cannot assess or Carry out regularly the checks guarantee these attributes for other recommended in the individual sections products, even if they have been granted of this Owner’s Manual. approval by the relevant authorities or in some other form. Ensure that your vehicle is serviced at the Service work, service intervals specified in the Service Maintenance Booklet. We recommend that you entrust this work to your Vauxhall Authorised We recommend that you entrust all work to Repairer. your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can provide you with reliable service and Have faults remedied without delay! correctly perform all work according to Consult a workshop. We recommend your factory instructions. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If necessary, interrupt your journey. 6 Vauxhall Service – page 294, service interval display – pages 44, 296. 6 Maintenance – page 296. In Brief 27

That was the most important information for your first drive in your Astra in brief.

The other pages of this chapter contain a summary of the interesting functions in your vehicle.

The remaining chapters of the Owner’s Manual contain important information on operation, safety and maintenance as well as a complete index. 28 In Brief

Vauxhall Full Size airbag system Side airbag system 3 Active head restraints 3 on front The Vauxhall Full Size airbag system The side airbag is triggered in the event of seats comprises several individual systems. a side-on collision to form a safety cushion In the event of a rear-end impact, the for the driver or front passenger in the active head restraints tilt forward a little. Front airbag system respective door area. This substantially The front airbag system will be triggered in The head is more effectively supported by reduces the risk of injury to the upper body the head restraint and the danger of the event of a serious accident involving a and pelvis. frontal impact and forms safety cushions injuries caused by hyperextension in the for the driver and front passenger. The Curtain airbag system 3 area of the cervical vertebrae is reduced. forward movement of the driver and front The curtain airbag system triggers in case Active head restraints are identified by the passenger is checked and the risk of of a side-on collision and provides a safety lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint injuries to the upper body and head barrier in the head area on the respective guide sleeves. thereby substantially reduced. side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of injury to the head considerably in case of a 6 Headrests – page 88. side-on collision. 6 Vauxhall Full Size Airbag System – Page 117. In Brief 29

Operating menus in Selection using multifunction button 3 Selection with left adjuster wheel on the information display 3 rotate and press multifunction button. steering wheel 3 turn adjuster wheel and Menu options are selected via menus using To exit a menu, turn the multifunction press. the buttons/four-way button or the button left or right to Return or Mainand 6 Information Display – page 46. multifunction button of the Infotainment select. system 3 or the left adjustment wheelbuttons 3 on the steering wheel. The respective menu options are shown on the display. Selection using four-way button 3 press four-way button at top, bottom, left or right. 30 In Brief

Range 257 miles Coolant level check Inst. consumpt. 7.6 miles/gal

19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19:36 OK

Trip computer 3 Check control 3 Remote control on steering The trip computers provide information on The check control software monitors wheel 3 driving data, which is continually recorded z Fluid levels The functions of the infotainment system 3 and evaluated electronically. and the information display can be z Tyre pressure 3 Functions: operated with the remote control on the z Range z Radio remote control battery steering wheel. z Instantaneous consumption z Vauxhall alarm system 3 Further information is available in the z Distance travelled infotainment system operating z z Average speed Important exterior lighting lights, instructions. z Effective consumption including cables and fuses. 6 Remote control on steering wheel 3 – z Average consumption 6 3 Check Control – Page 62. Page 64, Infotainment System – Page 65. z Stop watch z Tyre pressure 3 6 Trip computer 3 – Pages 52, 58. In Brief 31

Twin Audio 3 Open&Start system Parking distance sensor 3 Twin Audio allows rear seat occupants the with electronic key When reverse gear is selected, the parking choice between the audio source played on and radio remove control 3 distance sensor switches itself on the infotainment system or a separate The Open&Start system allows the vehicle automatically. audio source. to be locked and unlocked, including anti- The parking distance sensor can also be Only an audio source that is not currently theft locking system 3 and the Vauxhall activated at speeds of less than 15 mph (25 active on the infotainment system can be alarm system 3 without a mechanical key km/h) by pressing the r button on the controlled using Twin Audio. and the engine to be started and stopped instrument panel. using a start/stop button. All the driver has Two headphone connections are available, to do is carry the electronic key around with If the vehicle approaches an obstacle when with separate volume controls. him. reversing, a series of signals can be heard in the vehicle interior. The interval between Further information is available in the 6 Open&Start System 3 – Page 70. infotainment system operating the signals becomes shorter as the instructions. distance is reduced. If the distance is less than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous. 6 Twin Audio 3 – Page 64. 6 Parking distance sensor 3 – Page 218. 32 In Brief

Sport mode 3 Tyre pressure loss After tyre pressure is corrected or a tyre or To activate monitoring system wheel is changed, the system must be Press button SPORT. (DDS = Deflation Detection initialised by pressing the DDS button. SPORT mode is used to change System) 3 6 Tyre deflation detection system 3 damping 3,steering 3, throttle application The deflation detection system – Page 221. and the shift point for Easytronic 3 and continuously monitors the speed of all automatic transmission 3 while driving. wheels while driving. If a tyre loses pressure, it grows smaller and therefore Damping and steering become more direct rotates more quickly than the other wheels. and provide better contact with the road If the system detects a difference in speed, surface. The engine reacts more quickly to the control indicator w illuminates in red. accelerator movements. With Easytronic 3 and automatic transmission 3, the shift times are shortened and shifting takes place at higher revs (not with cruise control enabled 3). 6 Sport mode 3 – Page 214. In Brief 33

Ü Board Computer

BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyres

Tyre pressure monitoring Adaptive Forward Lighting Curve lighting system 3 (AFL) 3 The Xenon light beam pivots based on improves lighting in curves (curve lighting) steering wheel position and speed (from The tyre pressure monitoring system approx. 6 mph /10 km/h). continually checks the pressure and speed on vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlight of all four wheels while driving. system. Motorway lighting At higher speeds and continuous straight A pressure sensor is installed in each wheel. ahead travel, the dipped beam The inflation pressures of the individual automatically raises slightly, thereby wheels are transmitted to a controller, increasing headlight range. where they are compared. 6 Adaptive driving lights 3 – Page139. The current tyre pressures can be displayed on the graphical information display or the colour information display 3. Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in the form of messages on the information display whilst driving. 6 Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – Page 221. 34 In Brief

Panoramic windscreen 3 Adjusting the rear row of seats 3 Cargo box 3 To open: Collapsible box to divide the luggage z Pull the handle below the seat Turn the handle to the right and move the compartment. z Slide the seat bench to the desired roof lining rearward to a suitable position. The cargo box may only be loaded when position To close: the backrests are engaged in an upright Move the roof lining forward to a suitable z Release the handle and engage the seat position. bench position. When moved all the way forward, When removing, start with the right half. the roof lining engages in position. 6 Adjusting the rear row of seats 3 6 Cargo Box 3 – Page 103. 6 Panoramic roof 3 – Page 146. –Page 90. In Brief 35

FlexOrganizer 3 Luggage compartment cover, Astra TwinTop The side walls contain retaining strips, Estate With TwinTop, a convertible hardtop, Astra where various components can be To open: unites the benefits of a coupe with those of attached to divide the luggage Press handle on luggage compartment a convertible. compartment or fasten loads. cover down. The cover automatically To optimise safety, the Astra TwinTop is The system consists of unrolls. equipped with a rollover protection system z adapters 6 Luggage compartment cover 3 with reinforced windscreen frame and the z variable partition net – Page 98. choice of fixed or deployable anti-roll bars z mesh pockets for the side walls in addition to the front and side airbag z hooks in the luggage compartment systems. 6 FlexOrganizer 3 – Page 102. The roof is operated with the buttons on the roof console above the mirror or with the remote control. To improve luggage compartment accessibility, the electric loading aid makes it possible to raise the open roof when it is stowed in the luggage compartment. 6 TwinTop – see page 148. 36 Instruments Instruments

Control indicators – The electronic key is in the wrong Control indicators ...... 36 The control indicators described here are location in the vehicle interior (do not put key in luggage Instrument display...... 43 not present in all vehicles. The description applies to all instrument versions. compartment or in front of Information display ...... 46 information display), or the Radio reception 3...... 64 The control indicator colours mean: electronic key is not in the vehicle Remote control on steering wheel 3.. 64 z Red Danger, important reminder, interior, or influence from an Twin Audio 3 ...... 64 external interference source (radio z Yellow Warning, note, fault, Mobile telephones and radio masts, interfering transmitters in the equipment 3...... 65 z Green Engagement confirmation, vicinity). Infotainment system 3...... 65 z Blue Engagement confirmation. or – – Electronic key failure, for emergency operation – page 73. 0 Open&Start system 3 If the battery in the electronic key needs Control indicator lights or flashes yellow. changing, InSP3 appears in the service display or, in vehicles with check control 3, If it flashes by an appropriate message in the System has not detected electronic key in information display – pages 44, 74. vehicle interior. The reasons for this may be: Instruments 37 lights I Fault in Open&Start system. 9 Warning Engine oil pressure Lock or unlock vehicle using remote control Control indicator lights red. When the engine is off, considerably or emergency key if necessary – page 80, It illuminates when the ignition is switched more force is needed to brake and steer. or attempt to use the spare key. on and goes out shortly after the engine Do not remove key until vehicle has come Emergency operation – page 81. starts. to a standstill, otherwise the steering If 0 illuminates, this can also mean that Illuminates when the engine is running column lock could engage unexpectedly. the steering wheel lock is still locked: move Engine lubrication may be interrupted. This steering wheel to and fro a little and press may result in damage to the engine and/or Consult a workshop. We recommend your Start/Stop button again. locking of the drive wheels: Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If 0 illuminates whilst driving a system 1. Depress clutch. error has occurred that may eventually 2. Shift manual transmission or lead to a complete failure. Easytronic 3 into neutral; for automatic If 0 illuminates or flashes: The Start/Stop transmission 3 , set selector lever to N. button must be held depressed somewhat 3. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly longer to switch off the ignition. It is as possible without impeding other possible that the vehicle will not start vehicles. during the next start attempt. 4. Switch off ignition. If 0 continues to flash or remains illuminated, consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 38 Instruments

v Airbag systems 3, belt tensioners 3, deployable anti-roll bars 3 Control indicator lights red. Illuminates when the engine is running Fault in airbag system, belt tensioners or roll-over protection, – pages 113, 123, 132.

v Electronic Stability Programme (ESP ®Plus ) 3 Control indicator flashes or lights yellow. R Flashing during driving Brake system, 9 Warning System actively engaged, clutch system – page 212, 213. Control indicator lights or flashes red. If it illuminates when the hand brake is not applied: Stop the vehicle; interrupt Illuminates while driving It illuminates after the ignition is turned on, your journey immediately. Consult a System switched off or fault in system for when the hand brake is applied or if the workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Electronic Stability Program, – page 213. brake or clutch fluid level is too low. For Authorised Repairer. further information – pages 226, 302. X Seat belt 3 For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control Control indicator lights or flashes red. indicator flashes for a few seconds when the ignition is turned off if the hand brake It lights after the ignition is turned on until is not applied. the seat belt is fastened. When driving begins, the control indicator flashes. Apply seat belt – page 115. Instruments 39

Q A j Door open Engine electronics, transmission Easytronic 3, Control indicator lights red. electronics 3 , start engine 3 It is illuminated when a door or the luggage immobiliser, diesel fuel filter Control indicator lights yellow. compartment is open. Control indicator lights or flashes yellow. It illuminates if the foot brake is not It illuminates for a few seconds when the operated. The indicator goes off as soon as p ignition is switched on. the foot brake is operated. The engine can Alternator Illuminates when the engine is running only be started with the foot brake Control indicator lights red. Fault in engine electronics or transmission operated, page 179. It illuminates when the ignition is switched electronics. Electronics switch to IDS+ on and goes out shortly after the engine emergency running programme, fuel Interactive Driving System 3, starts. consumption may increase and driveability Continuous Damping Control (CDC) 3 , of the vehicle may be impaired – page 210. Illuminates when the engine is running SPORT mode 3 Consult a workshop immediately. We Stop, switch engine off. Battery is not Control indicator lights yellow. charged. Engine cooling may not be recommend your Vauxhall Authorised operating. With a diesel engine the brake Repairer. It illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. servo unit may stop operating. Consult a Illuminated together with InSP4 in the workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall service display: Have the diesel fuel filter Illuminates while driving Authorised Repairer. drained of water – page 300. System fault. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Flashes when the ignition is on W Repairer. Coolant temperature Fault in the electronic immobiliser system; IDS+ – page 212, CDC – page 214, SPORT Control indicator lights red. the engine cannot be started – page 67. mode – page 214. Illuminates when the engine is running Stop and switch off engine. Coolant temperature too high: Danger of engine damage. Check coolant level immediately – page 300. 40 Instruments

O Turn signal lights Control indicator flashes green. The corresponding control indicator flashes on the side of the direction indicators selected. Both control indicators flash with the hazard warning lights on. Fast flashing: failure of a direction indicator light or associated fuse, failure of direction indicator light on trailer 3. Change bulbs – page 274. Fuses – page 266. S 8 Engine oil level 3 Exterior lights Y Control indicator lights yellow. Control indicator lights green. Fuel level The engine oil level is checked 1) It is illuminated when the exterior lights are Control indicator lights or flashes yellow. automatically. on – see page 136. lights Illuminates when the engine is running Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserve area. r Engine oil level too low. Check engine oil Parking distance sensor 3 Flashing level and top up engine oil if necessary, – Control indicator lights yellow. Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately. page 298. System fault. Consult a workshop. We Never let the tank run dry! recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Erratic fuel supply can cause catalytic Repairer. converter to overheat, – page 207. Parking distance sensor – page 218. Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed the fuel system as described on page 247.

1) Not on Z 14 XEP or Z 20 LEH engine. Sales designation – see page 314. Instruments 41

T > Z Winter programme of Fog lights 3 Exhaust emission 3 automatic transmission 3 or Control indicator lights green. Control indicator lights or flashes yellow. Easytronic 3 It is illuminated when the fog lights are on Symbol lights in gear display with Winter It illuminates when the ignition is switched – page 137. programme engaged. on and goes out shortly after the engine starts. C Further information – pages 182, 189, 196. Illuminates when the engine is running Main beam 1 Fault in emission control system. The Control indicator lights blue. SPORT mode of permitted emission limits may be It is illuminated when main beam is on and automatic transmission 3 exceeded. Consult a workshop. We during headlight flash – page 15. or Easytronic 3 recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Symbol lights in gear display with Sport Repairer. r programme engaged. Fog tail light If it flashes when the engine is running: Control indicator lights yellow. Further information – pages 181, 188, 195. Fault that can lead to destruction of the catalytic converter is indicated – page 209. It is illuminated when the rear fog lights are y Consult a workshop immediately. We on – page 137. Seat occupancy recognition 3 – recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Symbol lights or flashes in kilometre Repairer. display. u lights 3 Seat occupancy recognition has detected Anti-lock brake system (ABS) a child restraint system with transponders. Control indicator lights red. Airbag systems for the passenger are Illuminates while driving deactivated – page 124. Fault in antilock braking system Flashing : Fault in system or child seat with – page 228. transponder not correctly fitted – page 124. 42 Instruments

B Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) Control indicator lights or flashes yellow. lights System fault. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Flashing System converted to symmetrical dipped beam. AFL – page 139.

! w m Preheating system 3, Deflation detection system 3, tyre Cruise control 3 Diesel particle filter 3 pressure monitoring system 3 Control indicator lights green. Control indicator lights or flashes yellow. Control indicator lights red Tyre pressure loss – page 221. It is illuminated when the system is on lights – page 216. Preheating system active, switches on only Control indicator lights yellow if outside temperature is low. Fault in system – pages 221, 222. Consult a Flashing (in vehicles with diesel particle workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall filter) Authorised Repairer. Diesel particle filters require cleaning. As soon as the road and traffic situation permits, briefly increase speed to greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The control indicator goes off as soon as cleaning is complete. Instruments 43

Instrument display Speedometer Fuel gauge On some versions, the pointer of the Speed display. Pointer in left = Reserve area tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge zone or Y briefly moves to its end position when the illuminated ignition is switched on. Pointer in left = Fill up – page 205 Tachometer zone or Y Indicates engine speed. flashing Warning zone: Maximum permissible Never run the tank dry! engine speed exceeded; danger to engine. Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed the fuel system as described on page 247. Because of the fuel remaining in the tank, the amount of fuel required to fill the tank may be less than the specified tank capacity. 44 Instruments

Time display 3 To adjust the time, setting knob in instrument: Press for approx. 2 seconds: Hours flash Press briefly Set hours Press for approx. 2 seconds Minutes flash Press briefly Set minutes Press for approx. 2 seconds Clock is started.

Odometer display Bottom line: Service Display Top line: Odometer InSP Service interval display. Trip odometer or clock display 3 Shows remaining distance To switch between the trip odometer and Records the miles counted. until next service. the clock display 3, press reset knob Further information – page 296. briefly, see previous page. InSP2 Bulb failure 3 – page 274. Trip odometer InSP3 Low battery voltage for remote Display of miles covered since reset. control To reset, hold reset button down for or electronic key around one second with the ignition turned for Open&Start System 3 on, see previous page. , - pages 69, 74. 3 If the clock display is activated, first switch InSP4 Water in diesel fuel filter . to trip odometer. Contact your workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

On vehicles with check control 3 , a message is shown on the display instead of InSP2 and InSP3. Instruments 45

ESPoff Electronic Stability 1-5 or Program 3 1-6 3 current gear, Easytronic, deactivated – manual mode. see page 212. For Easytronic 3 , the display flashes for a ESP on Electronic Stability few seconds if A, M or R is selected when Program 3 the engine is running but the foot brake is activated – not depressed. see page 212.

Transmission display 3 Display of gear selected on automatic transmissions 3 or current gear or mode for Easytronic 3: P Park position of automatic transmission. R Reverse gear. N Neutral or idling position. A Automatic mode, Easytronic. M Manual mode, Easytronic. D Automatic mode, automatic transmission. 1-4 Current gear, automatic transmission. 46 Instruments

11:25} 21.5°C 12:01 17,0°C Range 257 miles FM 3 90,6MHz Range REG AS RDS TP RDS [TP] Inst. consumpt. 7.6 miles/gal 257km 19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19:36

Information display Board information display 3 Graphical information display 3, Triple information display Display of time, outside temperature and Colour information display 3 Display of time, outside temperature and date/infotainment system (when it is on). Display of time, outside temperature, date/ date/infotainment system (when it is on). An F in the display indicates a fault. Have infotainment system (when it is on) and climate control system 3. When the ignition is off, the time, date and the cause of the fault remedied. We outside temperature can be presented for recommend that you consult your Vauxhall The graphical information display presents 15 seconds by briefly pressing one of the Authorised Repairer. the information in monochrome. The colour two buttons below the display. information display presents the information in colour. An F in the display indicates a fault. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Instruments 47

The type of information and how it is displayed depends on the equipment of the vehicle and the settings of the trip computer 3, climate control system 3 and infotainment system 3. : Some information appears in the display in 8:56 -5,5°C an abbreviated form. Slippery road Climate control system – page 171. 07.04.2004 -2,5°C Infotainment system – see infotainment system instructions. An F in the display indicates a fault. Have OK the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Outside temperature In vehicles with graphical information A fall in temperature is indicated display 3 or colour information display 3, immediately and a rise in temperature a warning message appears the display as after a time delay. a warning for icy road surfaces. There is no message below -5 °C. If outside temperature drops to 3 °C, the symbol : illuminates in the triple 9 Warning information display or the board information display 3 as a warning for icy Caution: The road surface may already road surfaces. : remains illuminated until be icy even though the display indicates temperatures reach at least 5 °C. a few degrees above 0 °C. 48 Instruments

Correcting time 3 Deactivating/activating automatic time Some RDS transmitters do not send a synchronisation: infotainment system off, correct time signal. If the incorrect time is press Ö and ; below the display: 8:56 5,5°C continually displayed, switch off automatic Hold down Ö for approx. 2 sec., clock 3 time synchronisation and set the time display is now in setting mode. manually - see next column. 07.04.2004 Press Ö twice (until year flashes). The automatic setting is indicated by } in the display. Press Ö and hold down for approx. 3 seconds until } flashes in display 3 and "RDS TIME" appears (years flash during this time). Press ;, display indicates: RDS TIME 0 = Off. Press ;, display indicates: Triple information display RDS TIME 1 = On. Set date and time Press Ö three times. Infotainment system off: press Ö and ; below the display as follows: Press Ö for approx. 2 seconds: Day flashes ;:Set day Ö:Month flashes ;:Set month Ö:Year flashes ;:Set year Ö:Hours flash ;: Set hours Ö:Minutes flash ;:Set minutes Ö:Clock is started. Instruments 49

11:25} 21.5°C Range

257miles

Board information display 3, Select options via the menus and with the Depending on the equipment level of the Selecting functions buttons/four-way button on the vehicle, menu options can be selected with 3 3 Functions and settings of some infotainment system . the left adjuster wheel on the steering equipment 3 can be accessed via the wheel. The relevant menu options are then board information display. shown in order on the display. 3 This is done via the menus and the buttons/ If check control issues a warning four-way button on the infotainment message, the display is blocked from other system 3 or with the left adjuster wheel 3 functions. Acknowledge the message by on the steering wheel. The relevant menu pressing the four-way button to the right or 3 options are then shown in order on the left or by pressing the left adjuster wheel display. on the steering wheel. If there are several warning messages, acknowledge them one at a time. System settings – page 50. Trip computer – page 52. 50 Instruments

The functions are displayed in the following order: z Time synchronisation z Time, setting hours 11:25} 21.5°C z Time, setting minutes 11:25} 21.5°C z Date, setting day z Date, setting month System z Date, setting year Clock Sync.On z Ignition logic z Language selection z Setting units of measure

Board information display 3, Correcting time 3 System settings Some RDS transmitters do not send a Press the Settings button of the correct time signal. If the incorrect time is infotainment system. Menu item Audio or continually displayed, deactivate 3 System will appear. automatic time synchronisation and set the time manually - see next page. Press the lower button of the four-way button to reach menu item System. After pressing the right-hand part of the four- way button, the first function of the System menu is shown. Some information appears in the display in an abbreviated form. Instruments 51

The automatic setting is indicated by } in the display. To correct time with the help of RDS, select the menu item for time synchronisation from the Settings menu. 11:25} 21.5°C 11:25} 21.5°C Make the desired setting. Setting date and time English Unit -SI Select the menu item for time and date setting from the Settings menu. Make the desired setting. The setting is saved when the menu item is exited. Ignition logic 3 Language selection Setting units of measure See infotainment system instructions. You can select the display language for You can select which units of measure are some functions. to be used. Select the menu item for language from the Select the menu item for units of measure Settings menu and make the desired from the Settings menu and confirm the setting. desired setting. 52 Instruments

Board information display 3, trip Average consumption computer 3 Display of average consumption. The The trip computer provides information on measurement can be reset at any time and driving data, which is continually recorded restarted, see "Reset". and evaluated electronically. 11:25} 21.5°C Effective consumption Access trip computer vehicle data by Display of fuel used. The measurement can pressing the BC button on the infotainment Inst. Consumpt. be reset at any time and restarted, see system or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the "Reset". steering wheel. Average speed Some information appears in the display in 7.6l/100km Display of average speed. The an abbreviated form. measurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset". Once an audio function has been selected, the subsequent rows of the trip computer Stoppages in the journey with the ignition function are displayed. Instantaneous consumption off are not included in the calculations. Display changes depending on speed: The functions are displayed in the following Distance travelled order: Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h). Display of miles travelled. The measurement can be reset at any time and z Instantaneous consumption Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h). restarted, see "Reset". z Average consumption z Effective consumption z Average speed z Distance travelled z Range z Stop watch Instruments 53

Reset: Reset trip computer information

The following trip computer information 11:25} 21.5°C can be rest (reset and restart 11:25} 21.5°C measurements or calculations): z Average consumption Range z Effective consumption Stop Watch z Average speed z Distance travelled. 257km Select the desired trip computer 01:22:32h information. Reset by pressing left adjuster wheel 3 on Range steering wheel or by pressing the four-way Stop watch Range is calculated from current fuel tank switch to the left or right: Select function, operate with four-way content and instantaneous consumption. Press for more than switch: The display shows average values. 2 seconds current value Press right button Start/Stop After refuelling, the vehicle updates the Press for more than Press left button range automatically after a brief delay. 4 seconds All values. at least 2 seconds Reset If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven Operating using the left adjuster wheel 3 with the fuel remaining in the tank, the on the steering wheel: warning " Range"appears on the display. Press Start/Stop. If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven with the fuel remaining in the tank, the Interruption of power supply warning " Refuel!" 3 appears on the If the power supply has been interrupted or display. if the battery voltage has dropped too low, Acknowledge the menu item as described the values stored in the trip computer will on page 54. be lost. 54 Instruments

Range 257 miles

Inst. consumpt. 7.6 miles/gal

19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19:36

Graphical information display 3 To select with four-way button: To select using the multifunction button: or Select menu items via menus and with the Turn Mark menu items colour information display 3 buttons/four-way button of the or commands, select Selecting functions infotainment system. functions The functions and settings of some If check control 3 issues a warning Press Select marked item, equipment 3 can be accessed via the message, the display is blocked from other confirm command. graphical information display or the colour functions. Acknowledge the message by To exit a menu, turn the multifunction information display. pressing the right or left portion of the four- button left or right to Return or Mainand way button. If there are several warning select. These functions are marked or executed in messages, acknowledge them one at a the menu display via the four-way switch, time. If check control 3 issues a warning the multifunction knob 3 on the message, the display is blocked from other Infotainment System or the left adjuster functions. Acknowledge the message by wheel 3 on the steering wheel. pressing the multifunction button. If there are several warning messages, acknowledge them one at a time. Instruments 55

7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3 Time, Date 19:36 Language ᕃ 90.6 MHz Units 10 . 07 . 2004 Contrast Day / Night

19,5° 19:36 6 Ign. logic

Select using the left adjuster wheel 3 on For each functional area there is a main System settings the steering wheel: page (Main), which is selected at the top The settings are accessed via the Settings Turn up Previous edge of the display (not with the menu. menu item Infotainment system CD 30 or the Mobile Press the Main button 3 (not found on all Turn down Next Phone Portal): infotainment systems) on the infotainment menu item z Audio system (call up main display). z 3 Press Select marked item, Navigation , Press the Settings button of the z 3 confirm command. Telephone , infotainment system. On Infotainment z Trip computer 3. If check control 3 issues a warning System CD 30, make sure no menu has 3 3 message, the display is blocked from other For Audio, Navigation and Telephone been selected. functions. Acknowledge the message by functions – see infotainment system The Settings menu is displayed. pressing the left adjuster wheel. If there are instructions. several warning messages, acknowledge them one at a time. 56 Instruments

Correcting time 3 In systems with GPS receiver1), date and time are set automatically upon receipt of 7 Time, Date 19,5° 19:36 a GPS satellite signal. If the displayed time 7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 does not match local time, it can be Time, Date Time 19:36 corrected manually or automatically by receiving an RDS time signal 2) 3. Language Deutsch Date 10 . 07 . 2004 Some RDS transmitters do not send correct Units English time signals. If the incorrect time is Contrast Español displayed often, deactivate automatic Day / Night ... 6 Synchron. clock automatical. time synchronisation 3 and set the time manually. 6 Ign. logic To correct time with the help of RDS, select menu item Synchron. clock automatical. Setting the date and time 3 from the Time, Date menu. Language selection Select menu item Time, Date, from the You can select the display language for Settings menu. The box in front of Synchron. clock some functions. automatical. will be ticked; The menu for Time, Date is displayed. see Fig. 17340 T. Select menu item Languagefrom the Select the menu items required: Settings menu. Make the desired setting. The available languages are displayed.

1) GPS = G lobal P ositioning S ystem, Satellite system for world-wide positioning. 2) RDS = R adio D ata S ystem. Instruments 57

7 13 Languages 19,5° 19:36 7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 7 Contrast 19,5° 19:36 X Deutsch Time, Date English Language ~ Europe-SI Español Units | Japan 12 Dutch Contrast | Great Britain French Day / Night | USA Italiano 6 Ign. logic

Select the desired language. Setting units of measure Adjusting contrast 3 Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of You can select which units of measure are (graphical information display) the menu item. to be used. Select menu item Contrastfrom the Settings menu. In systems with voice output 3, when the Select menu item Units from the Settings language setting of the display is changed menu. The menu for Contrast is displayed. the system will ask whether the The available units are displayed. Confirm the required setting. announcement language should also be Select the desired unit. changed – see Infotainment system instructions. Selections are indicated by a o in front of the menu item. 58 Instruments

Setting display mode 3 The display can be adjusted to suit the light conditions, black or coloured text on a light background or white or coloured text on a Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 dark background. BC 1 All values Select menu item Day / Night from the BC 2 Range 257 miles Settings menu. 257.0 miles Timer The options are displayed. Ø40mph Tyres Automatic: adapted based on vehicle Inst. consumpt. 7.6 miles/gal 31.0 gal lighting. Ø 7.0 miles/gal Always day design: black or coloured text 19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19:36 on light background. Always night design: white or coloured 3 Range text on dark background. Graphical information display or Range is calculated from current fuel tank Selections are indicated by a o in front of Colour information display 3, Trip content and instantaneous consumption. the menu item. computer 3 The display shows average values. Ignition logic 3 The trip computers provide information on After refuelling, the vehicle updates the See infotainment system instructions. driving data, which is continually recorded range automatically after a brief delay. and evaluated electronically. The trip computer main page provides information on range and instantaneous consumption. To display other trip computer data, press the BC button on the infotainment system 3, select the trip computer menu front the display or press the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. Instruments 59

Distance travelled Display of miles travelled. The measurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset". Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 Average speed BC 1 All values Calculation of average speed. The BC 2 Range measurement can be reset at any time and 257.0 miles restarted, see "Reset". Timer 33miles Ø40mph Stoppages in the journey with the ignition Tyres off are not included in the calculations. 31.0 gal OK Effective consumption Ø 7.0 mpg Display of fuel used. The measurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see If the fuel in the tank will allow less than "Reset". Reset: 30 miles (50 km) of travel, the warning Average consumption Reset trip computer information "Range" appears on the display. Calculation of average consumption. The If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven measurement can be reset at any time and The following trip computer information with the fuel remaining in the tank, the restarted, see "Reset". can be reset (restart measurements): warning " Please refuel!" 3 appears on the z Distance display. z Average speed z Acknowledge the menu item as described Effective consumption z on page 54. Average consumption. Instantaneous consumption Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer Display changes depending on speed: menu. Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h). Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h). 60 Instruments

Interruption of power supply If the power supply has been interrupted or if the battery voltage has dropped too low, Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 the values stored in the trip computer will be lost. All values All values

257.0 miles 257.0 miles Ø40mph Ø40mph

31.0 gal 31.0 gal Ø 7.0 miles/gal Ø 7.0 miles/gal

The information of the two trip computers To reset all information of a trip computer, can be reset separately, making it possible select menu item All values. to evaluate data from different time After resetting, "- - -" is displayed for the periods. trip computer information selected. The Select the desired trip computer recalculated values are displayed after a information. brief delay. The value for the selected function will be reset and recalculated. Instruments 61

The desired stop watch display can be selected from the Options menu 3: Driving Time excl. Stops Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 Ü Board Computer The time the vehicle is in motion is BC 1 recorded. Stationary time is not included. BC 1 BC 2 00:00:00 Driving Time incl. Stops BC 2 Timer The time the vehicle is in motion is Timer recorded. The time the vehicle is stationary Tyres Start with the key in the starter switch is Tyres Reset included. Options Travel Time Measurement of the time from manual activation via Start to manual deactivation Stop watch via Reset. Display of current tyre pressure 3 Select menu item Timer from the Board Select menu item Tyres from the Board Computer menu. Computer menu. The Timer menu is displayed. The current pressure of each tyre is To start, select menu item Start. displayed. To reset, select menu item Reset. Further information – page 222. 62 Instruments

Check control 3 Examples of warning messages for the Check control monitors some fluid levels, graphical information display 3 and the tyre pressure 3, battery of the remote colour information display 3 are depicted. control, the antitheft warning system 3, On the board information display, the brake light switch and important messages appear in an abbreviated form. exterior lights, including cable and fuses. In Acknowledge warning messages as trailer mode, the trailer lighting is described on pages 49, 54. Coolant level monitored. Unacknowledged warning messages can check Warning messages appear on the display. be re-displayed later. If there are several warning messages, they Warning messages: are displayed one after the other. OK Some of the warning messages appear on Remote Control the display in an abbreviated form. Battery check Brakelight switch Battery voltage of remote control or check electronic key of Open&Start system too low – page 69. Fault. Brake light does not come on when brake applied. Have cause of fault remedied immediately. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Safeguard check Fault. System error in Vauxhall alarm system. Have cause of fault remedied immediately. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Instruments 63

If there is a fault in the vehicle lighting, the In vehicles with tyre pressure control Wash respective fault source is displayed as text, system 3, if there is major loss of pressure Fluid Level e.g.: in a tyre, the display indicates the tyre at check Brakelight fault, e.g.: Fluid level in windscreen wash system too check right Attention! low. Topping up wash fluid – page 305. Rear left tyre Rear window wash system and headlight In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring pressure loss wash system 3 are deactivated if wash system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the (value in bar) fluid level is low. display indicates which tyre to check, e.g.: Stop immediately and check tyre and tyre Tyre pressure pressure. Tyre pressure monitoring Coolant level check rear system 3 – page 222. check right tyre Fluid level in engine cooling system is low. (value in bar) Check coolant level immediately Check tyre pressure at next opportunity – page 300. using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure Interruption of power supply 3 monitoring system – page 222. Checking Stored warning messages appear on the tyre pressure – page 333. display one after the other. 64 Instruments

Radio reception 3 Car radio reception differs from domestic radio reception: As the vehicle antenna is relatively near the ground, the broadcasting companies cannot guarantee the same quality of reception as obtained with a domestic radio using an overhead antenna. z Changes in distance from the transmitter, z multi-path reception due to reflection and z shadowing may cause hissing, noise, distortion or loss 3 of reception altogether. Remote control on steering Twin Audio wheel 3 Twin Audio allows rear seat occupants the The functions of the infotainment system 3 choice between the audio source played on and the information display can be the infotainment system or a separate operated on the steering wheel. audio source. Further information – page 49 and the Only an audio source that is not currently relevant operating instructions. active on the infotainment system can be controlled using Twin Audio. Two headphone connections are available, with separate volume controls. Further information is available in the infotainment system operating instructions. Instruments 65

Mobile telephones and radio Obtain advice on predetermined For reasons of safety, we recommend that equipment 3 installation locations for the external you do not use the phone while driving. The Vauxhall installation instructions and antenna and equipment holder and ways Even use of a handsfree set can be a the operating guidelines provided by the of using devices with transmission power of distraction while driving. Be sure to observe telephone manufacturer must be observed more than 10 Watts. We recommend that any country-specific regulations. when fitting and operating a mobile you consult your Vauxhall Authorised telephone. Failure to do so could invalidate Repairer, who will have brackets and 9 Warning the vehicle’s operating permit various installation kits available as When used in the vehicle interior, mobile (EU Directive 95/54/EG). accessories and will install them in accordance with regulations. telephones and radio equipment (CB) Prerequisites for fault-free operation: with integrated antenna may cause z Professionally installed exterior antenna malfunctions in the vehicle electronics. to obtain the maximum range possible Mobile telephones and radio equipment z Maximum transmission power 10 Watt, (CB) should only be used with an antenna fitted on the vehicle exterior. z Installation of the telephone in a suitable spot (see information on page 126). Infotainment system 3 The infotainment system is operated as described in the operating instructions. 66 Keys, doors, bonnet Keys, doors, Replacement keys The key number is specified in the vehicle bonnet documents and in the Car Pass 3. The key is a constituent of the electronic immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer guarantees problem- free operation of the electronic immobiliser. When electronic keys of the Open&Start system are being replaced, all keys must be handed to the dealer for programming. Keep the spare key in a safe spot. Locks – page 311, Open&Start system, electronic keys Key with foldaway Electronic immobiliser...... 67 – page 70. key section 3 Radio remote control 3 with Press button to extend. Press button to mechanical key ...... 68 Car Pass retract; key section engages audibly. Open&Start system 3 ...... 70 The Car Pass contains all of the vehicle’s Central locking system ...... 76 data and should therefore not be kept in Fault when locking or unlocking...... 80 the vehicle. Luggage compartment...... 81 Have your Car Pass on hand when Vauxhall alarm system 3...... 83 consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Child safety locks 3 ...... 86 Bonnet ...... 86 Keys, doors, bonnet 67

Electronic immobiliser Control indicator for immobilizer A If control indicator A illuminates after the The system checks whether the vehicle may Control indicator A illuminates briefly engine is started, there is a fault in the be started with the mechanical key or when the ignition is switched on. engine electronics or transmission 3 electronic key of the Open&Start system 3 If the control indicator flashes when the electronics - pages 184, 190, 198, 210 or 3 that is being used. If the key is recognised ignition is on, there is a fault in the system; there is water in the diesel fuel filter as "authorised" the vehicle can be started. the engine cannot be started. Switch off - page 300. The check takes place via a transponder in the ignition and then repeat the start Note the key. attempt. The immobiliser does not lock the doors. The electronic immobiliser activates itself If control indicator A continues to flash, Therefore, after leaving the vehicle always automatically after the key has been try to start the engine using the spare key lock it and switch on the Vauxhall alarm 3 removed from the ignition or, with the and consult a workshop. We recommend system – pages 76, 83. Open&Start system 3, when the engine is your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button. The code number of the electronic immobiliser is given in the Car Pass. 68 Keys, doors, bonnet

Store personal vehicle settings in the vehicle key 3 The last settings selected z for the climate control system 3 z information display 3 z Infotainment system 3 z instrument illumination are stored automatically depending on the vehicle key used. Different settings stored for each vehicle key are retrieved automatically on use the The radio remote control has a range of vehicle key concerned. Radio remote control 3 with mechanical key approx. 5 metres. This range can be Each time the vehicle is locked, the settings Radio remote control in version with affected by outside influences. Aim the are saved again. Open&Start system – page 70. remote control at the vehicle to operate. The radio remote control is integrated in Handle the radio remote control with care, the key. protect it from moisture and high temperatures and avoid unnecessary Used to operate: operation. z central locking system, z mechanical anti-theft locking system 3, The hazard warning lights come on to z Vauxhall alarm system 3. indicate that the remote control is operational. Depending on the equipment level of the vehicle 3 , the windows of vehicles with electric windows in all doors 3 can be opened or closed from outside using the radio remote control - page 79. On the Astra TwinTop, the roof can also be opened or closed with the remote control 3. Keys, doors, bonnet 69

Central locking system, Fault mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 If the central locking system cannot be – page 76. operated with the radio remote control, it Vauxhall alarm system 3 may be due to the following: – page 83. z The range of the radio remote control Electric windows 3 has been exceeded. – page 143. z Radio remote control battery voltage is Astra TwinTop too low. Battery replacement - see next – page 148. page. z Frequent, repeated operation of the radio remote control outside the reception range of the vehicle (e.g. too far from vehicle, remote control is then no longer recognised). Remote control Remote control battery replacement synchronisation - see next page. Replace the battery as soon as the range z If the central locking system is of the radio remote control begins to overloaded as a result of repeated shrink. operation at short intervals. The power Key with foldaway key section supply is cut off for a brief period. Extend key, – page 66. Open radio remote z Interference from higher-power radio control. Replace battery - battery type, waves from other sources. – page 342 - noting installation position. Close radio remote control. To eliminate the cause of the fault, contact your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in accordance with environmental Open driver’s door with key, – page 80. protection regulations. Key with fixed key section Entrust battery replacement to a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Radio remote control synchronisation After a battery change, unlock the door with the key in the lock. Synchronise by turning on the ignition. 70 Keys, doors, bonnet

Open&Start system 3 The electronic key must be within the When the Start/Stop button is pressed, the The Open&Start system allows the vehicle external reception range about 1 metre system re-checks the authorisation. The to be locked and unlocked, including the from the vehicle in order to lock and unlock electronic key has to be recognised in the anti-theft locking system 3 and the the vehicle. interior in order to do this. After the key has Vauxhall alarm system 3, and the engine If the electronic key is recognized as been authorised the ignition switches on. to be started and stopped without a "authorised," the vehicle can be unlocked At the same time, the electronic mechanical key. All the driver has to do is by pulling a door handle or the knob immobiliser is switched off and the electro- keep the key on his person. beneath the tailgate handle and the doors mechanical steering column lock is and the tailgate can be opened. deactivated. Pressing the Start/Stop button Depending on the equipment level of the again with the brake or clutch pedal vehicle 3 , the windows of vehicles with depressed or in P or N with automatic electric windows in all doors 3 can be transmission 3 starts the engine. Press the opened or closed from outside using the button for at least one second with the remote control of the electronic key vehicle stationary or hold until the engine - page 79. starts. On the Astra TwinTop, the roof can also be opened or closed with the remote control 3 of the electronic key. Keys, doors, bonnet 71

If the brake or clutch pedal is depressed, the engine can be started right away with a single press on the Start/Stop button. Releasing the Start/Stop button interrupts the starting procedure. The engine and the ignition are switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button again. The vehicle must be stationary. The immobiliser is activated at the same time. If the ignition has been switched off and the vehicle is stationary, the steering wheel lock activates automatically when the driver’s door is opened or closed. The electronic key must be within the The vehicle is locked from the outside with Radio remote control interior reception in order to switch the the doors closed by touching the sensor The vehicle can be locked and unlocked by ignition on or off. We recommend that the panel in the door handle of one of the front conventional means using the radio driver carries the electronic key on his or doors. The electronic key must be within remote control with the buttons on the her person. If the electronic key is not the external reception range of electronic key. recognised, try a different position for the approximately one metre from the vehicle. In addition, the anti-theft locking system key. The Open&Start system 3 does not the lock and anti-theft alarm system can be armed Do not put the electronic key in the the vehicle automatically if the electronic and disabled using the radio remote luggage compartment or in front of the key is outside the external reception range control. Depending on the equipment level information display. of approximately one metre from the of the vehicle 3, the windows of vehicles vehicle. with electric windows in all doors 3 can be opened or closed from outside using the radio remote control.

6 72 Keys, doors, bonnet

The radio remote control has a range of If the control indicator 0 is permanently approx. 5 metres. This range can be on, an error has occurred in the system. affected by outside influences. Aim the Lock or unlock vehicle using the radio remote control at the vehicle to operate. remote control or the emergency key if Handle the radio remote control with care, necessary – page 80, or try using the spare protect it from moisture and high key. temperatures and avoid unnecessary If 0 illuminates, this can also mean that operation. the steering wheel lock is still locked: move The hazard warning lights come on to steering wheel to and fro a little and press indicate that the remote control is Start/Stop button again. operational. Illumination of 0 whilst driving indicates a Central locking system, system fault. Consult a workshop mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. – page 76. Control indicator for Open&Start system Anti-theft alarm system 3 0 Emergency operation – page 73. – page 83. If the control indicator flashes 0 with the Lockable glove compartment, ignition switched on or with the engine 3 Electric windows 3 Astra TwinTop with Open&Start system running an operating error has occurred, – page 143. In addition to the electronic key of the e.g. the electronic key is no longer within Open&Start system, there is a standard key Astra TwinTop the reception range of the vehicle interior. without remote control for the glove – page 148. During the next starting procedure the compartment lock. engine may not be able to be started. Press Start/Stop key somewhat longer to switch the ignition off. Flashing of the 0 can also be an indication of complete failure of the electronic key. In this case operation is only possible using the emergency facility – page 73. InSP3 in the service display or an appropriate message in the information 3 display indicates that the battery of the electronic key needs replacing – page 74. Keys, doors, bonnet 73

Emergency operation Only the driver’s door can be locked and To start the engine, hold the electronic key If the Open&Start system fails or the unlocked using the emergency key. Unlock at the marked position, depress brake electronic key (control indicator 0 flashes the entire vehicle as described on page 80. pedal or clutch pedal or in vehicles with or permanently on) the driver’s door can be In the version with Vauxhall alarm automatic transmission 3 depress brake locked or unlocked with the emergency key system 3 the alarm may be triggered pedal and engage P or N, Then press the in the electronic key: press locking when the vehicle is unlocked. Switch Start/Stop button. mechanism on underside and remove cap ignition on to deactivate alarm and release Press start/stop button for at least 1 second toward the front by applying gentle the steering column lock: hold electronic to switch the engine off. Lock all doors pressure to the cap. Push emergency key key at marked position on the steering except driver’s door as described on towards the outside over the detent and column panelling and press the Start/Stop page 80. Unlock driver’s door with remove. button. Repeat procedure if necessary. emergency key. This facility is only intended for emergencies. Replace battery in electronic key at the earliest opportunity or have the system repaired. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 74 Keys, doors, bonnet

Radio remote control synchronisation The radio remote control synchronises itself automatically during every starting procedure.

Replacing battery in electronic key To replace the battery, press the locking Replace the battery immediately if the mechanism on the underside of the system is no longer working properly or the electronic key and remove the cover range of the radio remote control is towards the front by applying gentle reducing. The need for a battery change is pressure – page 73, figure 17037 T. Push indicated via InSP3 in the service display or, off cover with emblem on the button side in vehicles with check control 3, by an towards the outside. appropriate message in the display Replace battery, for battery type – page 44. – page 342, pay attention to installation position. Engage caps. Keys, doors, bonnet 75

Fault in Open&Start system or radio z If the central locking system is To remedy the cause of the problem, move remote control. overloaded as a result of repeated electronic key or radio remote control to If the central locking cannot be operated or operation at short intervals. The power another location or change the remote the engine cannot be started, the cause supply is cut off for a brief period. control battery. If the problem persists we may be one of the following: z Interference from higher-power radio recommend that you consult your Vauxhall z Electronic key out of reception range, or waves from other sources. Authorised Repairer. out of range of radio remote control, Emergency operation, – page 73. z Radio remote control battery voltage too low – see previous page for instructions on how to change battery, z Frequent, repeated operation of the radio remote control outside the reception range (e.g. too far from vehicle, remote control is then no longer recognised). 76 Keys, doors, bonnet

Central locking system Open&Start system with To lock For doors, boot lid/tailgate and tank flap. electronic key 3 Close doors, luggage compartment and The electronic key must be in the outer tank flap. To unlock reception range of the vehicle. The vehicle Radio remote control with Remote control with is unlocked by pulling a door handle or mechanical key mechanical key operating the button beneath the tailgate Press button p on radio remote control. Press button q on radio remote control. handle To open the door, pull the handle. Open – or – the luggage compartment by pulling the by pressing button q of the electronic knob under the tailgate handle. key’s remote control. Keys, doors, bonnet 77

Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3, 9 Warning

Do not use the system if there are people in the vehicle! The doors cannot be unlocked from inside.

Open&Start system with electronic key 3 Radio remote control with The electronic key must be outside of the mechanical key vehicle. There must not be any electronic All doors must be closed. At the latest 15 key in the vehicle interior. All of the doors seconds after locking, press button p of and the luggage compartment are locked the radio remote control again. by touching the sensor in the handle of the Lock buttons on all doors are positioned driver’s or front passenger door such that doors cannot be opened. – or – by pressing button p of the electronic If the ignition was on, the driver’s door key’s remote control. must be opened and closed once so that the vehicle can be secured. 78 Keys, doors, bonnet

press button p of the electronic key’s remote control again. If the ignition was on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed once so that the vehicle can be secured. All doors are secured against opening.

Open&Start system with Central locking button for locking and electronic key 3 unlocking the doors from inside the All doors must be closed. The electronic key vehicle must be outside of the vehicle. No more Press button m in the centre console: doors than 15 seconds after locking, touch the are locked or unlocked. sensor in the handle of the driver’s or front The LED in the central locking button m passenger door again illuminates for around 2 minutes after – or – locking with the remote control. If the doors are locked from the inside during driving using the central locking button, the ELD m lights permanently. If the key is in the ignition, locking is only possible if all doors are closed. When the mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 is active – see previous page – the doors cannot be unlocked with this button. Keys, doors, bonnet 79

Note z With the Open&Start system 3 the z If the driver’s door is not closed properly, vehicle cannot be unlocked until 2 the central locking system will not lock. seconds after locking. Within this time, a z To lock the doors from within door handle can be pulled or the button (e.g. to prevent unwanted entry from beneath the tailgate handle operated to outside), press central locking switch m check whether the vehicle is locked. in the centre console. z The Open&Start system 3 does not lock z After unlocking with the key in the lock the vehicle automatically if the electronic and opening the driver’s door, the entire key is outside the reception range of the vehicle is unlocked. vehicle (more than 1 metre away from the vehicle). z If locked via the central locking system, z 3 the doors can also be opened by pulling When using the Open&Start system , the inside door handles. The central there must not be an electronic key inside the vehicle when locking. locking system is also unlocked at this Operating the windows 3 from the time (not possible on Astra TwinTop z The locking sensors in the door handles outside when the roof is open). must be kept clean to ensure z Locked doors unlock automatically in unrestricted functionality of the 9 Warning 3 the event of an accident of a certain Open&Start system . severity (to allow external help to gain Take care when operating the electric access). The hazard warning lights and windows. Risk of injury, particularly to courtesy light also come on. For this to children. occur, the key must be in the starter Vehicle passengers should be informed switch. accordingly. Keep a close watch on the windows when closing them. Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them as they move.

Depending on the equipment level of the vehicle 3 , the windows of vehicles with electric windows in all doors 3 can be opened or closed from outside:

6 80 Keys, doors, bonnet

Overload The power supply is cut off for a brief period if the central locking system is repeatedly operated at short intervals. The system is protected by a fuse in the fuse box – page 266. Further information on windows with electric drive – page 145.

Radio remote control with Fault when locking or mechanical key unlocking q p Hold button or on the radio remote Fault in radio remote control or control depressed until all windows have Open&Start system. opened or completely closed. To unlock Open&Start system with Turn key or emergency key for Open&Start electronic key 3 system – page 73 anticlockwise in the Hold down button q of radio remote driver’s door lock as far as it will go. Return control to open. To close, hold down button key to a vertical position and remove. The p or touch sensor in door handle for entire vehicle is unlocked when the driver’s longer. The electronic key must be door is opened. recognised within the external reception range. It is advisable for the driver to keep the electronic key on his person. Further information on windows – page 143. Keys, doors, bonnet 81

For Astra TwinTop with open roof - after Luggage compartment opening the driver’s door, press the central To unlock locking button m in the centre console. The Radio remote control with vehicle will then be unlocked, provided the mechanical key anti-theft locking system 3 is not Press button q on the remote control. The engaged. Switch on the ignition to luggage compartment is unlocked deactivate the Vauxhall alarm system 3. together with the doors. Emergency operation of the Open&Start system – page 73. Open&Start system with electronic key 3 To lock By pulling the knob under the tailgate Open passenger door, close driver’s door, handle, the luggage compartment press central locking button m in centre together with the doors is unlocked and console. Central locking system locks all opened if the electronic key is detected in doors. Close passenger door. the outer reception range, Malfunction in central locking system To lock – or – To unlock Insert the key or emergency key for press button q on the radio remote control Turn key or emergency key with Open&Start system – page 73 into the of the electronic key and the luggage Open&Start system – page 73, forwards in opening above the lock on the inside of the compartment is unlocked together with the driver’s door lock as far as it will go. Turn door and press until the lock audibly doors. key back to a vertical position and remove. engages. Then close the door. The The other doors can be opened by pulling procedure must be repeated for each door. the handle on the inside of the doors (not The driver’s door can also be locked from possible if anti-theft locking system 3 outside using the lock. The unlocked fuel enabled beforehand). The luggage filler flap and tailgate/boot lid cannot be compartment and the fuel filler cap remain locked. locked. To deactivate the anti-theft locking Emergency operation of system 3 switch ignition on Open&Start system 3 – page 14. – page 73. 82 Keys, doors, bonnet

To open: To close: To lock The luggage compartment is opened by Close luggage compartment using the Close doors, luggage compartment and operating the button beneath the handle. handle on the inside of the tailgate. tank flap. Do not operate the button beneath the Radio remote control with 9 Warning handle when closing. Otherwise the mechanical key luggage compartment will once again be Press button p on radio remote control. Do not drive with the tailgate open or unlocked. ajar, e.g. when transporting bulky Open&Start system with objects, since toxic exhaust gas could electronic key 3 penetrate the interior. Press button p of the electronic key radio remote control or touch sensor in handle of Fitting of accessories on the tailgate will one of the front doors. The electronic key increase its weight. If it becomes too heavy, must be recognised in the external the tailgate will then not stay open. reception area. It is advisable for the driver to keep the electronic key on his person. Keys, doors, bonnet 83

Vauxhall alarm system 3 monitors z the doors, luggage compartment, bonnet z the passenger compartment z vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised, z the ignition. 9 Warning

Do not use the system if there are people in the vehicle! The doors cannot be unlocked from the inside. To activate Open&Start system with Radio remote control with electronic key 3 mechanical key The doors, the windows and the bonnet All doors, windows, the sun roof 3 and the must be closed. The electronic key must be bonnet must be closed. Within 15 seconds in the outside reception range of the of locking, press button p on the radio vehicle. Touch the sensor in the door remote control again. handle of the driver’s or front passenger If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s door again no more than 15 seconds after door must be opened and closed once so locking that the Vauxhall alarm system can be – or – p switched on. press button of the electronic key’s remote control again. If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed once so that the Vauxhall alarm system can be switched on. 84 Keys, doors, bonnet

4. Switch on Vauxhall alarm system. LED illuminates. After approx. 10 seconds the system is activated, without monitoring of the passenger compartment or vehicle tilt. LED flashes until system is switched off. For Astra TwinTop, passenger compartment monitoring is deactivated if the roof is open to prevent false alarms. Light emitting diode (LED) During the first 10 seconds of anti-theft alarm system activation: z LED illuminated = Test, switch-on Activation without monitoring of delay After the first 10 seconds of anti-theft passenger compartment and vehicle tilt z LED flashes = Door, luggage alarm system activation: e.g. if animals are to be left in the vehicle. compartment, z LED flashes = System 1. Close tailgate and bonnet. rapidly bonnet open, slow switched on, system fault. 2. Press button b in the roof console. The z LED illuminates LED in button m flashes (max. 10 for approx. 1 second =Switch-off seconds) – see next column If a system fault occurs, consult a 3. Close doors. workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Keys, doors, bonnet 85

In the event of a fault in the radio remote control or the Open&Start system, open the vehicle as described on page 80. If the alarm is triggered when the driver’s door is opened, deactivate the Vauxhall alarm system by switching on the ignition. Note Changes to the vehicle interior, such as the use of seat covers, could impair the function of passenger compartment monitoring. Alarm While the Vauxhall alarm system is To deactivate Open&Start system with switched on the alarm can be triggered: Radio remote control with electronic key 3 z an acoustic signal (horn) and mechanical key Pulling a handle or operating the button z a visual signal (hazard warning lights). Press button q of the radio remote control beneath the tailgate handle unlocks the The number and duration of the alarms are –or– vehicle and disarms the Vauxhall alarm legally established. turn on ignition. system if the electronic key has been The alarm is silenced by pressing a button recognised in the outer reception range of of the radio remote control or by switching the vehicle on the ignition. The Vauxhall alarm system – or – is deactivated at the same time. if button q on the electronic key’s remote control has been pressed. 86 Keys, doors, bonnet

Child safety locks 3 Bonnet The bonnet is held open automatically 3. To open the bonnet, pull the release lever In another design, to lock the bonnet in the 9 Warning located on the driver’s side below the open position, insert the rod lying across instrument panel. The bonnet will then be the radiator into the small slot on the Use the child safety lock whenever unlocked and will partially open. Return bonnet underside. Press rod firmly into its children are occupying the rear seats. release lever to its original position. holder before closing. Disregard may lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle passengers should There is a safety catch on the underside of Lower the bonnet and allow it to drop into be informed accordingly. the bonnet: lift this upwards and open the its catch. bonnet. Check that the bonnet is locked in position Using key or screwdriver, turn knob on rear Dirt on snow on the bonnet can slide onto by pulling at its front edge. If it is not door lock from the vertical position: door the windscreen when opened and block the engaged, repeat the procedure. cannot be opened from inside. air intake. Air intake – page 177. Seats, Interior 87

Seats, Interior Head restraints...... 88 Stowage compartments ...... 110 Head restraints ...... 88 Sun visors ...... 110 Armrest 3 at driver’s seat...... 90 Adjusting the rear row of seats 3 ...... 90 Armrest 3 in the rear backrest ...... 90 Luggage compartment enlargement, Hatch ...... 91 Luggage compartment enlargement, Estate without adjustable rear row of seats ...... 92 Luggage compartment enlargement, Estate with adjustable rear row of seats...... 94 Front seat adjustment Extending the luggage compartment, Astra TwinTop...... 97 see pages 3, 4. Folding down the front passenger seat 3...... 97 Seat position Luggage compartment cover ...... 98 Adjust driver’s seat such that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is Safety net 3, Estate...... 99 held in the area of its upper spokes with the 3 Luggage compartment grille , Van. 101 driver’s arms slightly bent. Rails and hooks in the luggage compartment 3, Estate ...... 102 FlexOrganizer 3, Estate ...... 102 Lashing eyes 3 ...... 103 Cargo box 3...... 103 Luggage compartment blind, Astra TwinTop ...... 104 Easy Load...... 104 Notes on loading the vehicle...... 106 Cigarette lighter 3...... 107 Accessory socket 3...... 107 Ashtray 3 ...... 108 Foldaway tables 3 ...... 109 88 Seats, Interior

Push passenger seat as far back as possible. The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back (recommended tilting angle approx. 25 °). 9 Warning

Failure to observe the descriptions could lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly before starting off.

Head restraints To adjust The middle of the head restraint should be front head restraints (all variants) at eye level. If this is not possible for and outboard rear head restraints extremely tall persons, set to highest Hatch and Estate position, and set to lowest position for To adjust, press button on side and adjust small persons. height. To fold down the backrests – page 91 or 9 Warning improve visibility when the rear seats are not occupied, remove the head restraints Failure to observe the descriptions can or push them all the way down. lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle passengers should be informed If the seats are occupied, set height accordingly before moving away. according to body size.

Removal, see page 89. Seats, Interior 89

To adjust the To adjust the Removing the head restraints centre rear head restraint 3, rear head restraints 3, Astra TwinTop Press and release the two catches. Pull and Hatch and Estate To adjust, pull the head restraint up or remove the head restraint. To adjust, pull the head restraint up or press the two catches to release. Then push To fold down the backrests 3 – page 91, press the catch to release. Then push the the head restraint down. push the rear head restraints all the way head restraint down. To improve visibility when the rear seats down or remove. To fold down the backrest – page 91 or are not occupied, push the head restraints improve visibility when the centre rear seat all the way down. is not occupied, remove the head restraint If the seats are occupied, set height or push it all the way down. according to body size. If the seat is occupied, set height according Do not place any objects on the cover to body size. behind the head restraints or between the head restraints and the anti-roll bars 3. 90 Seats, Interior

Armrest 3 at driver’s seat Adjusting the rear row of seats 3 Armrest 3 in the rear backrest Push raised armrest backward against Pull the handle below the seat the slide the Fold down the armrest, pulling the strap resistance and fold down. seat bench to the desired position. obliquely down (45°). The armrest can be moved to different Release the handle and engage the seat When the centre rear seat is in use or the positions in stages by lifting it. bench. rear backrests are folded, fold the armrest Stowage compartment in armrest, up. – page 110. A flap located behind the armrest facilitates transport of long, narrow objects – see page 96. Seats, Interior 91

Astra TwinTop Luggage compartment Fold down centre backrest 3 Pull the armrest by the strap, pivot it down enlargement, Push head restraint all the way down and position on the sit with the flat side up. Hatch – page 89. The armrest is held in place on the backrest Folding the backrest Disengage backrest using handle and fold with a retaining strap. To fully remove the Pushing rear head restraints all the way onto seat cushion. armrest, disengage the bracket at the down or remove – page 88. Folding down the centre seat backrest retaining strap. Slide front seat forward slightly. makes it possible to load longer objects. A flap located behind the armrest The outer seats can still be used for Disengage the backrest (single or split 3) facilitates transport of long, narrow objects occupants. using the pushbutton and fold it down onto – page 97. the seat cushion. 9 Warning Return front seat to desired position. The load must not obstruct the operation of the pedals, the handbrake or the gears or restrict the driver’s freedom of movement. Do not place loose objects in the interior. 92 Seats, Interior

Restoring backrest to an upright position Luggage compartment Raise the seat cushion and fold the Guide the seat belt through the side enlargement, backrest bracket to protect against damage. Estate without adjustable Pull the strap on the seat cushion and lift Restore the backrest to an upright position rear row of seats the backrest forwards (single or split). and audibly engage. Fold the backrest onto the seat cushion Detach the hooks of the luggage The three-point seat belt for the centre rear Push the rear head restraints all the way compartment cover from the head seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel down or remove – page 88. Detach the restraints – page 99. if the backrest is properly engaged. hooks of the luggage compartment cover from the head restraints – page 99. Notes on loading – page 106. Slide front seat forward slightly. Disengage the backrest (single or split) using the pushbutton and fold it down onto the seat cushion. Return front seat to desired position. Seats, Interior 93

Remove the outer rear head restraints. Disengage the backrest (single or split) Fold down centre backrest 3 Push the centre head restraint all the way using the pushbutton, fold it forward and Push head restraint all the way down down – page 88. engage. – page 89. Stow the removed head restraints in the Disengage backrest using handle and fold cavity below the raised seat cushions. onto seat cushion. If the seat cushion is raised, fold it forward until it engages. Folding the centre seat backrest makes it possible to load longer objects. The outer seats can still be used for occupants. 9 Warning

The load must not obstruct the operation of the pedals, the handbrake or the gears or restrict the driver’s freedom of movement. Do not place loose objects in the interior. 94 Seats, Interior

Restoring the backrests or seat Raised seat cushions : Insert and adjust Luggage compartment cushions 3 to their original position head restraints in backrests – pages 5, 88. enlargement, Guide the seat belt through the side Fold back seat cushions, making sure the Estate with adjustable rear row of bracket to protect against damage. belt buckles are properly positioned. seats To restore the backrest to an upright Attach the hooks of the luggage Fold backrests onto seat cushions position, fold up, pressing the button on compartment cover to the head restraints Push the rear head restraints all the way the backrest. Audibly engage the backrest – page 99. down or remove – page 88. Detach the in an upright position. The three-point seat belt for the centre rear hooks of the luggage compartment cover seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel from the head restraints – page 99. if the backrest is properly engaged. Slide front seat forward slightly. Safety net 3 Disengage the backrest (single or split) – page 99. using the sliders and fold it down onto the Notes on loading seat cushion. – page 106. Return front seat to desired position. Seats, Interior 95

Raise the seat cushion and fold the Remove the outer rear head restraints. Disengage the backrest (single or split) backrest Push the centre head restraint all the way using the sliders, fold it forward and Lift rear seat cushions forward, single or down – page 88. engage. split. Stow the removed head restraints in the Detach the hooks of the luggage cavity below the raised seat cushions. compartment cover from the head restraints – page 99. 96 Seats, Interior

Loading option behind the armrest in the Restoring the backrests or seat Raised seat cushions : Insert and adjust rear seat backrest 3 cushions 3 to their original position head restraints in backrests – pages 5, 88. Fold down the armrest, pulling the strap Guide the seat belts through the side Fold back seat cushions, making sure the obliquely down (45°). brackets to protect against damage. belt buckles are properly positioned. Pull the handle and fold down the cover. To restore the backrest to an upright Attach the hooks of the luggage Folding down the cover makes it possible position, fold up, disengaging the backrest compartment cover to the head restraints to load long, narrow objects. The outer at the sliders. Audibly engage the backrest – page 99. seats can still be used for occupants. in an upright position. The three-point seat belt for the centre rear seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel 9 Warning if the backrest is properly engaged. Safety net 3 The load must not obstruct the operation – page 99. of the pedals, the handbrake or the gears or restrict the driver’s freedom of Notes on loading movement. Do not place loose objects in – page 106. the interior.

To restore, fold the armrest back in position. Seats, Interior 97

Extending the luggage Cover behind armrest can be locked from Folding down the front passenger compartment, luggage compartment 3 : turn handle 90°: seat 3 Astra TwinTop Locked = Handle horizontal Push front passenger seat head restraint Loading area between rear seats Unlocked = Handle vertical all the way down or remove – pages 5, 88. Pull out the armrest by the strap. Notes on loading Push front passenger seat back. The armrest is held in place on the backrest – page 106. Fold front passenger seat forward by with a retaining strap. To fully remove the raising release lever. armrest, disengage the bracket at the retaining strap. Raise front passenger seat backrest Raise release lever and engage passenger Pull the handle and fold down the cover. seat back audibly. 9 Warning

The load must not obstruct the operation of the pedals, the handbrake or the gears or restrict the driver’s freedom of movement. Do not place loose objects in the interior. 98 Seats, Interior

Luggage compartment cover Estate To cover the gap between the luggage Hatch To open: compartment cover and the rear To remove, unhook the retaining straps Press handle on luggage compartment backrests, there is a cover on the cartridge. from the tailgate. cover down. The cover automatically Attach the two hooks of the cover to the unrolls. head restraint guide rods. If the safety net Pull cover from the side guides. To close: is mounted, run the hooks through the net Fit in reverse order. Press handle on luggage compartment mesh. cover rearwards; the cover automatically 6 engages in its end position. Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged objects on the cover. Seats, Interior 99

Removing Safety net 3, Fixed rear row of seats: Extend the safety Open the luggage compartment cover and Estate net straps by adjusting the strap at the detach the hooks from the head restraints. The safety net can be mounted behind the upper fastener in the loop of the strap (see Move release lever on right side of luggage rear seats or, if the rear seat backrests are Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the compartment cover upward. Lift right folded and the seat cushions raised, eyelets in the floor on the right and left. cover and remove from brackets. behind the front seats. Fitting Passengers must not be carried behind the Insert the luggage compartment cover in safety net. the recess on the left, press the release Fitting behind the rear seats lever on the right side upward, insert the Remove the luggage compartment cover - cover in the recess on the right, engage see left column. and press the lever down. Unroll the safety net. Attach the hooks on the head restraints (see Fig. 17079 T). There are two brackets in the roof frame. Hook the net rods into the brackets on one side and then the other. Slide forward to engage. 100 Seats, Interior

Adjustable rear row of seats 3 : Extend the safety net straps by adjusting the strap at the upper fastener in the loop of the strap (see Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the eyelets on the back of the right and left rear seat backrest. Install the luggage compartment cover - see left column.

Fitting behind front seats Adjustable rear row of seats 3 : Extend the Raise the rear seat cushions – pages 92 safety net straps by adjusting the strap at and 95. the upper fastener in the loop of the strap Unroll the safety net. (see Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the brackets on the right and left raised seat There are two brackets in the roof frame cushions. above the front seats. Hook the net rods into the brackets on one side and then the Remove the outer rear head restraints and other. Slide forward to engage. fold the backrests forward – pages 92 and 94. Fixed rear row of seats: Extend the safety net straps by adjusting the strap at the upper fastener in the loop of the strap (see Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the eyelets in the floor on the right and left. Seats, Interior 101

Removing Luggage compartment grille 3, To close the grille section from the open Detach the safety net belt straps by tipping Van position, press bracket down, fold down up the length adjuster. To transport long objects, part of the grille and lock. Unhook the safety net rods from the luggage compartment grille behind the Check that the closed grille is properly brackets in the roof frame. Roll up the net passenger seat can be opened: locked. and secure with a strap. Release passenger seat back and fold forward. Press bracket down and fold grille section up. Lock grille in open position. 102 Seats, Interior

Rails and hooks FlexOrganizer 3, Variable partition net in the luggage compartment 3, Estate Insert an adapter in each rail: Fold up Estate Flexible system for dividing the luggage handle plate, insert adapter in upper and lower groove of rails, move to desired The side walls of the luggage compartment compartment or securing loads in an position. To lock the adapter, swivel the house two rails. Insert the hooks in the Estate. handle plate up. Compress the rods of the desired position in the rails: insert the hook The system consists of partition net slightly and insert in in the upper groove on the rail and press in z Adapters corresponding openings of the adapter. the lower groove. z variable partition net The longer rod must be inserted in the Pull off the hook to remove. z mesh pockets for the side walls upper adapter. z Hooks in the luggage compartment Components are mounted in the two guide rails in the side walls of the luggage compartment by means of adapters or hooks. Seats, Interior 103

Hooks and mesh pocket Lashing eyes 3 Cargo box 3 Insert the hooks in the desired position in in the luggage compartment are intended Foldable box under the floor cover used to the rails: insert the hook in the upper for fixing lashing straps 3 or a luggage divide the luggage compartment. groove on the rail and press in the lower 3 net . They secure transport items from The cargo box may only be loaded when groove. The mesh pocket can be hung from slipping. the hooks. the backrests are engaged in an upright position. Removing Press the partition net rods together and To remove the cargo box floor cover, remove from the adapters. remove first the right half then the left half. For models with towing equipment, first Adapter: fold open the retainer, release the release the coupling ball bar fixing strap adapter from the lower groove and remove and thread this through the eye from the upper groove. – page 242. Installation in the reverse Release the hooks from the rails. order. 104 Seats, Interior

Luggage compartment blind, Easy Load z Briefly press button ,: The folded roof is Astra TwinTop (Electrically operated loading aid raised. The roof remains in this end To open: for the luggage compartment position for approx. 9 minutes. Disengage the luggage compartment of the blind from the recess on the right and left. Astra TwinTop) Rolls up automatically. The loading aid makes it possible to To close: comfortably load the luggage Grasp the handle, pull the blind towards compartment when the roof is open. The the rear of the vehicle and engage in the press of a button will raise the roof folded recess on the right and left. up in the luggage compartment 25 cm. Do not place any objects on the blind. This enlarges the load opening of the luggage compartment. There must be no objects outside of or on top of the luggage compartment blind z Open the boot lid. when the roof is open or in the process of z Unhook the luggage compartment blind opening. and attach it to the rear window frame. The roof can only be operated with the luggage compartment blind engaged in the recess. Seats, Interior 105

Note 9 Warning z Do not place objects on or near the luggage compartment blind. Take care when operating the loading z aid. Risk of injury. The folded roof can only be lowered when the blind is closed. Otherwise, a Make sure that nothing could be pinched. warning buzzer will sound three times. Make sure no one is in the action zone z Movement can only be stopped by during operation. Risk of injury. pressing button ,. Holding the button This is especially important for children. depressed will change the direction of Inform passengers accordingly. movement. z A confirmation signal sounds in the upper and lower end positions. z Only close the boot lid once the z Load luggage compartment at most to confirmation signal has sounded to marked load height, otherwise the roof indicate that the loading aid is in its and load could be damaged. lower end position. z Suspend the luggage compartment z If the loading aid is not in its lower end blind from the rear window frame, and position when the boot lid is closed, a engage in recesses on right and left. The warning tone sounds or the boot lid is luggage compartment blind must be blocked mechanically 3, – page 153. flat; objects underneath it must not push z Do not touch moving parts. it upwards. z One minute before the end of the hold z Briefly press button ,: The folded roof is time for the raised loading aid, a lowered. warning buzzer will sound to remind you z Close the boot lid only after the to lower the roof. confirmation signal has sounded. z The loading aid is only operable when Otherwise the roof could be damaged. the vehicle is unlocked. 106 Seats, Interior

z Estate: mount the safety net 3 when z Astra TwinTop: Do not place any objects transporting objects in the luggage on the cover of the deployable anti-roll compartment – page 99. bars 3, behind the rear head restraints z Estate: close the luggage compartment or in the luggage compartment outside cover so the rear window does not reflect of, on or next to the luggage the objects. compartment cover. z z If the backrests are not folded down Do not place any objects in the when transporting objects in the deployment area of the airbags and 3 luggage compartment, they must be deployable anti-roll bars as this poses engaged in their upright position 3 a risk of injury should the systems be – pages 92, 94, 96. triggered. z z Do not allow the load to protrude above Do not drive with luggage compartment the upper edge of the rear seat open when transporting bulky objects, for example, since toxic exhaust fumes Notes on loading the vehicle backrests, or above the upper edge of the front seat backrests if the rear seat could penetrate the interior. backrests 3 are folded down. z Weights, payload and roof load z Heavy objects in the luggage – page 324. compartment should be placed against z Astra TwinTop: Note the maximum the engaged rear seat backrests 3 or, if loading height when the roof is open z Driving with a roof load the rear seat backrests are folded down, (See page 104, Fig. 17973 T). – pages 200, 203, 238, increases the against the front seat backrests. If z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit sensitivity of the vehicle to cross-winds objects are to be stacked, the heavier (cushion) 3 must always be freely and has a detrimental effect on vehicle objects should be placed at the bottom. accessible. handling owing to the vehicle’s higher Unsecured objects in the luggage centre of gravity. z Do not place any objects in front of the compartment would be thrown forward rear window or on the instrument panel. with great force in the event of heavy 9 Warning They are reflected in the glass, obstruct braking, for example. the driver’s view and will be thrown Failure to observe these descriptions can z Secure objects with lashing straps 3 through the vehicle, for instance in the lead to injuries which may be fatal. attached to lashing eyes – see page 103. event of heavy braking. Vehicle passengers should be informed If heavy loads slip when the vehicle is z The load must not obstruct the operation accordingly. braked heavily or driven around a bend, of the pedals, the handbrake or the the handling of the vehicle may change. gears or restrict the driver’s freedom of movement. Do not place loose objects in the interior. Seats, Interior 107

Cigarette lighter 3 Press in cigarette lighter. Switches off Accessory socket 3 The cigarette lighter is located under the automatically once the element is glowing. Some vehicles have an accessory socket for ashtray cover. Pull out lighter. the connection of electrical accessories The cover opens when pressed at the point instead of a cigarette lighter. Use of the indicated. accessory socket while the engine is not running will discharge the battery. 108 Seats, Interior

Estates have an additional accessory Ashtray 3 To empty, grip both sides of the ashtray socket 3 in the luggage compartment. To be used only for ash and not for insert at the spots illustrated and pull Do not damage the sockets by using combustible rubbish. upwards. unsuitable plugs. 9 Warning The maximum power consumption of electrical accessories must not exceed 120 Failure to observe these descriptions can watts. lead to injuries which may be fatal. Do not connect any current-delivering Vehicle passengers should be informed accessories, e.g. electrical charging accordingly. devices or batteries. Ashtray, front Electrical accessories connected to the The cover opens when pressed at the point socket must comply with the indicated. electromagnetic compatibility requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839, otherwise vehicle malfunctions may occur. If the tyre repair kit 3 is in operation, no consumers may be connected to the auxiliary socket. Seats, Interior 109

Foldaway tables 3 on the front seat backrests. Open by pulling upward until it engages. Fold away by pressing down past the resistance point. Do not place any heavy objects on the table.

Rear ashtray 3 To empty, open the ashtray, press the In the rear centre console. spring (arrow) and pull the ashtray straight Pull out the ashtray by pushing on one of out rearwards. the sides. 110 Seats, Interior

Stowage compartments Stowage compartment in Stowage compartment for glasses 3 Glove compartment front armrest 3 On driver’s side: fold down to open. To open, pull handle upwards. To open, press button and open upper part Do not store heavy objects in the stowage of armrest. The glove compartment shelf 3 can be compartment. removed: Disengage the shelf by pulling on the front edge. Sun visors Use the sun visor to protect from glare by Refit the shelf by sliding it into the side pulling it down and swivelling it to the guide strips and engage it in the rear panel side 3. by pushing. On vehicles with panoramic windscreen 3, The front of the open cover houses a pen close the sun visors before moving the roof holder and a coin compartment. lining. Cooled glove compartment 3 – page 159. Safety systems 111 Safety systems Three-stage safety system Comprising: 9 Warning z three-point seat belts The airbag systems and anti-roll bars 3 z belt tensioners at the front seats serve to supplement the three-point seat belts and belt tensioners. The seat belts z Three-point seat belts ...... 112 airbag systems for the driver, must therefore always be worn. front passenger and outboard rear Testing the belts ...... 112 Disregard of these instructions could lead seats 3; for TwinTop 3, anti-roll bars to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle Belt tensioners...... 113 behind the backrests. Using the belts ...... 115 passengers should be informed accordingly. Vauxhall Full Size airbag system ...... 117 The three stages are activated in sequence depending on the severity of the accident: Mounting brackets 3 for ISOFIX child Read the instructions supplied with the restraint systems ...... 129 z The automatic seat belt locking devices child restraint system! Child restraint system 3...... 130 prevent the belt strap from being pulled Rollover protection system 3...... 132 out and thus ensure that the vehicle Exterior mirrors...... 134 occupants are retained in their seats. Aspherical exterior mirror 3 ...... 134 z The front seat belts are pulled down at Automatic anti-dazzle interior the belt buckles. This means the belts fit mirror 3...... 134 snugly, the occupants are decelerated Sun visors, glove compartment ...... 134 early with the vehicle and the body Hazard warning flashers ...... 134 loading is reduced. Head restraints ...... 135 z In the event of a severe accident, the Safety accessories 3 ...... 135 airbag systems and deployable anti-roll bars 3 also deploy, forming safety cushions for the occupants. The front airbags are inflated in two stages based on the severity of the collision. 112 Safety systems

Testing the belts 9 Warning Please check all parts of the belt system occasionally for damage and correct Always wear your seat belt, and that operation. Have damaged parts replaced. means also in urban traffic and when you In case of an accident, please replace are a rear seat passenger. It can save overstretched belts and triggered belt your life! tensioners. We recommend that you Pregnant women must always wear a consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. seat belt – page 115. Do not perform any alterations on the belts, their anchorages, the automatic In the event of an accident, persons not retractors or the belt buckles. wearing seat belts endanger their fellow Make sure that belts are not damaged or occupants and themselves. trapped by sharp-edged objects. Control indicator X 3 for the seat belt Three-point seat belts – page 38. The vehicle is equipped with three-point Seat belts are only intended for one person. seat belts with automatic retractors and They are not suitable for anyone under 12 locking devices, allowing freedom of body years of age or under 150 cm tall. movement although the spring tensioned belts always ensure a snug fit. For children up to 12 years of age, we recommend the Vauxhall child restraint For information on correct seating position system – page 130. – pages 87, 115, 119. Belt force limiters The belts are locked during heavy on the front seats reduce the body load acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle. due to damped release of the belt on a collision. This means that the occupants move forward under control. Safety systems 113

9 Warning

Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Have your Car Pass on hand when consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Belt tensioners Control indicator v for belt tensioners The front seat belts are fitted with belt The function of the belt tensioners is tensioners. The seat belts are pulled down monitored electronically together with the at the buckles on a front or rear impact airbag systems and the deployable anti- above a certain severity. This tightens the roll bars 3. Their operational readiness is belts. indicated by control indicator v in the instrument panel. When the ignition is Actuation of belt tensioners switched on, the control indicator is indicated by illumination of control illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does indicator v, see next column. not illuminate, does not go out after 4 The belt tensioners must be replaced after seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there activation. We recommend that you is a fault in the belt tensioner or and airbag consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. systems or in the deployable anti-roll bars 3, – page 123. The systems may fail Important information – page 114. to trigger in the event of an accident. Deployment of the belt tensioners is indicated by continuous illumination of v. 114 Safety systems

Note z The belt tensioner and airbag system z The belt tensioners are for single use z Accessories and other objects not control electronics can be found in the only, indicated by the lighting of the v specifically approved for your vehicle centre console area. In order to avoid control indicators . Replace triggered type must not be affixed or placed within malfunctions, do not store magnetic belt tensioners. We recommend your the action zone of the belt tensioners objects in this area. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. (near the belt buckles) as this could z When using the rear seats, ensure that z Applicable safety directives must always result in injury if the belt tensioners are the front belt components are not be observed when disposing of the triggered. damaged by shoes or other objects. vehicle. For this reason, disposal should z Do not make any modifications to the Avoid dirt getting into the belt winders. be performed by an authorised recycling components of the belt tensioners, as z We recommend that you have the front company. We recommend that you this will render the vehicle unroadworthy. seats removed by a Vauxhall Authorised consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Repairer. 9 Warning

Incorrect handling (e.g. removal or fitting of belts or belt buckles) can trigger the belt tensioners with risk of injury. Safety systems 115

Height adjustment 3 Using the belts 9 Warning Fitting seat belts of front seat belt upper anchorage point: Pull the belt out of the retractor and guide On pregnant women in particular, the lap 1. Pull belt out slightly. it across the body, making certain that it is belt must be positioned as low as 2. Press down button on adjuster slide. not twisted. possible across the pelvis so as not to put 3. Move adjuster slide up or down. Insert the latch plate into the buckle. The too much pressure on the abdomen. front seat backrest must not be tilted back 4. Allow sliding adjuster to audibly latch. Bulky clothing prevents the belt from fitting too far or the seat belt will not operate Do not adjust height while driving. properly. The recommended angle of properly. The belt must not rest against hard or fragile objects in the pockets of inclination is 25 °. Make sure that the lap 6 belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pens, keys, across the body. Tension the belt spectacles) because these could cause frequently while driving by tugging the injury. Do not place any objects (e.g. diagonal part of the belt. handbags, mobile phones) between the belt and your body. 116 Safety systems

Three-point seat belts on rear outer seats When not in use, pass seat belts through side holders 3 as shown in Fig. 17063 T on page 92. Three-point seat belt of centre rear seat 3 The belt can only be pulled from the inertia reel when the backrests are upright and properly engaged – page 91. Three-point seat belts of rear seats in Astra TwinTop In order to prevent the flutter noise caused by the belts when the roof and windows are open, the seat belts can be secured behind the armrest when the rear seats are not Adjust height such that the belt passes Removing the belt occupied. over the wearer’s shoulder and rests To remove the belt, depress the red against the shoulder. It must not pass over pushbutton on the buckle; the belt will the neck or upper arm. retract automatically. Safety systems 117

Vauxhall Full Size airbag system Side airbag system 3 Curtain airbag system 3 The Vauxhall Full Size airbag system The side airbag is triggered in the event of The curtain airbag system triggers in case comprises several individual systems. a side-on collision to form a safety cushion of a side-on collision and provides a safety for the driver or front passenger in the barrier in the head area on the respective Front airbag system respective door area. This substantially side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of The front airbag system will be triggered in reduces the risk of injury to the upper body injury to the head considerably in case of a the event of a serious accident involving a and pelvis. side-on collision. frontal impact and forms safety cushions for the driver and front passenger. The forward movement of the driver and front passenger is checked and the risk of injuries to the upper body and head thereby substantially reduced. 118 Safety systems

Exception: Passenger seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3 . The seat occupancy recognition system deactivates the front and side airbags on the passenger side 3 if the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passenger seat. Seat occupancy recognition, see page 124. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – page 130. Examples of events triggering the front airbag system: Vauxhall Full Size airbag system z seat occupancy recognition 3, z Impact against a non-yielding obstacle: Front airbag z the control indicator for Vauxhall child the front airbags are triggered at low The front airbag system is identified by the restraint systems y with vehicle speed. word AIRBAG on the steering wheel and transponders 3 in the instrument panel. z Impact against a yielding obstacle (such above the glove compartment. The front airbag system will be triggered: as another vehicle): the front airbags are The front airbag system comprises: only triggered at a higher vehicle speed. z depending on the severity of the z an airbag with inflator in the steering accident wheel and a second one in the z depending on the type of impact instrument panel z within the range shown in the illustration z control electronics with impact sensors z independent of side airbag 3 and z control light for airbag curtain airbag system 3. systems v in instrument panel, Safety systems 119

When triggered, the front airbags inflate in milliseconds to form a safety cushion for 9 Warning 9 Warning the driver and front passenger. The forward movement of the front seat The front airbag system provides The three-point seat belt must be occupants is checked, thereby optimum protection when the seat, correctly fitted – page 115. substantially reducing the risk of injury to backrest and head restraint are correctly The front airbag system will not be the upper body and head. adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat according to the occupant’s height such triggered in the event of No impairment of view will occur, because that with the driver sitting upright the z the ignition is switched off the airbags inflate and deflate so quickly steering wheel is held in the area of its z minor frontal collisions that it is often not even noticed in an upper spokes with the driver’s arms z accidents in which the vehicle overturns accident. slightly bent. The passenger seat should z collisions involving a side or rear impact be as far back as possible, with the that is to say, if it would not be of benefit to backrest upright – pages 3, 87. Do not the occupants. place the head, body, hands or feet on the covers of the airbag systems. Do not place any objects in the area in which the airbags inflate. Important information – page 126. 120 Safety systems

9 Warning

Seat belts must therefore always be worn. The front airbag system serves to supplement the three-point seat belts. If you do not wear your seat belt you risk being seriously injured, or even thrown from the vehicle, in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident the belt helps to keep you in the correct seating position, so that the front airbag system can provide you with effective protection. Side airbag 3 The side airbag system will be triggered: In addition, the front airbag system will not The side airbag system is identified by the z be triggered for the front passenger in depending on the severity of the word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the accident versions with seat occupancy recognition 3 front seat backrests. if z depending on the type of impact The side airbag system comprises: z the front passenger seat is unoccupied z within the range shown in the illustration z an airbag with inflator in the back of the z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or driver’s and front passenger seat front passenger side, restraint system with transponders 3. respectively Seat occupancy recognition – page 124. z independently of the front airbag z Vauxhall child restraint system with the control electronics system. transponders 3 – page 130. z the side impact sensors Exception: Passenger seat with seat z control light for airbag occupancy recognition system 3 . The seat systems v in instrument panel, occupancy recognition system deactivates z seat occupancy recognition 3, the front and side airbags on the passenger side 3 if the front passenger z the control indicator for Vauxhall child seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint systems y with restraint system with transponders 3 has transponders 3 in the instrument panel. been fitted to the front passenger seat. Seat occupancy recognition, – page 124. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – page 130. Safety systems 121

In addition, the side airbag system 3 will 9 Warning not be triggered for the front passenger in versions with seat occupancy recognition 3 There must be no objects in the area in if which the airbag inflates or in the area z between the seat backs and the vehicle the front passenger seat is unoccupied body. Do not place the hands or arms on z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child the covers of the airbag systems. restraint system with transponders 3 . Important information – page 126. Seat occupancy recognition – page 124. The three-point seat belt must always be Vauxhall child restraint system with 3 correctly fitted – page 115. transponders – page 130.

The side airbags will not be triggered in the event of When triggered, the side airbag inflates z the ignition is switched off within milliseconds to form a safety cushion z for the driver or front passenger in the frontal collisions respective door area. This substantially z accidents in which the vehicle overturns reduces the risk of injury to the upper body z collisions involving a rear impact and pelvis in the event of a side-on collision. z Side-on collisions outside the passenger cell. 122 Safety systems

Curtain airbag 3 The curtain airbag system will be triggered: When the curtain airbag is triggered it The curtain airbag system is identified by z depending on the severity of the inflates within milliseconds and provides a the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim. accident safety barrier in the head area on the The curtain airbag system comprises: respective side of the vehicle. This reduces z depending on the type of impact the risk of injury to the head considerably in z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame z within the range shown in the illustration case of a side impact. on the driver’s and front passenger side on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or respectively front passenger side, z the control electronics z together with the side airbag system 3, z the side impact sensors z irrespective of seat occupancy z control light for airbag recognition 3, v systems in instrument panel. z independently of the front airbag system. Safety systems 123

9 Warning 9 Warning

There must be no objects in the area in Have the cause of the fault remedied. We which the airbag inflates. Do not place recommend that you consult your the hands or arms on the covers of the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. airbag systems. Important information – page 126. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Have The three-point seat belt must always be your Car Pass on hand when consulting a correctly fitted – page 115. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

The curtain airbags will not be triggered in the event of z the ignition is switched off Control indicator v for airbag systems z frontal collisions The function of the airbag systems is z accidents in which the vehicle overturns monitored electronically together with the seat occupancy recognition 3 and belt z collisions involving a rear impact tensioner systems 3 and the deployable z Side-on collisions outside the passenger anti-roll bars. Their operational readiness is cell. indicated by control indicator v. When the ignition is switched on, the control indicator illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go out after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in the airbag systems, seat occupancy recognition 3 or belt tensioner systems, or in the deployable anti-roll bars 3, – page 113. The systems may fail to trigger in the event of an accident. Deployment of the airbags is indicated by continuous illumination of v. 124 Safety systems

Seat occupancy recognition 3 The seat occupancy recognition system 9 Warning deactivates the front and side airbags 3 for the front passenger if the front Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with passenger seat is not occupied or a transponders 3 can be fitted on the front Vauxhall child restraint system with passenger seats. Use of systems without transponders 3 is fitted on the front transponders poses a risk of fatal injury. passenger seat. The curtain airbag system 3 remains activated. Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can be identified by a The control indicator y for seat sticker. occupancy recognition is located in the instrument panel. If the control indicator y Note illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when the On the Astra TwinTop, there may be ignition is switched on, the vehicle is interference in radio reception of certain equipped with seat occupancy recognition, Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition frequencies in the medium waveband see next page, Fig. 17117 T. are also identified by a sticker on the lower when the roof is open and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. If a Vauxhall child restraint system with panel of the front passenger seats – see transponders figure above. 3 is fitted, the control indicator y lights Vauxhall child restraint systems with permanently after the ignition is switched transponders 3 are automatically on as soon as the system has detected the detected if correctly fitted to the front child restraint system. Only then may the passenger seat. When this type of child child restraint system with transponders 3 restraint system is in use on the front be used on the passenger seat. passenger seat, the front and side airbag systems for the front passenger seat are deactivated. The curtain airbag system remains activated. Pay attention to control indicator y for seat occupancy recognition 3 see Fig. 17117 T. Safety systems 125

Control indicator y for Vauxhall If the control indicator flashes even though child restraint systems there is correctly installed child restraint with transponders 3 system with transponders 3, there is a fault The presence of a Vauxhall child restraint - risk of fatal injury to the child. Fit child system with transponders 3 is indicated restraint system to rear seat. Have the after the ignition has been switched on by cause of the fault remedied. We permanent illumination of the control recommend that you consult your Vauxhall indicator y in the instrument panel, as Authorised Repairer. soon as the seat occupancy recognition If no Vauxhall child restraint system with system has detected the child restraint transponders 3 is installed, the control system. indicator must neither illuminate nor flash, since this indicates that the front passenger airbag systems would not be triggered. Have the cause of fault If the control indicator does not illuminate remedied. We recommend that you consult whilst driving, the front and side airbag 3 your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. have not been deactivated on the passenger side. Risk of fatal injury to the 9 Warning child - fit child restraint system to rear seat. Have cause of fault remedied. We If the Vauxhall child restraint system with recommend that you consult your Vauxhall transponders 3 has been fitted Authorised Repairer. according to the instructions, the control indicator for Vauxhall restraint systems If the child restraint system is not correctly with transponders must illuminate in the installed or the transponder is faulty, the instrument panel when the ignition is control indicator flashes. Check for correct switched on. installation of child restraint system. To install the child restraint system with If the control indicator does not illuminate transponders 3, see the instructions whilst driving, the airbag systems have enclosed with the system. not been deactivated on the passenger side. Risk of fatal injury. In this case, fit child restraint system to rear seat. Have cause of fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 126 Safety systems

Important z Do not bond or use other material to z Each airbag or deployable anti-roll 3 z Do not affix or place accessories or other cover the steering wheel, dashboard, bar can only be deployed once. Have objects in the deployment area or the front seat backrests and roof frame in deployed components replaced airbag systems or deployable anti-roll the area of the airbags and the seat immediately. We recommend that you bars 3 as this could result in injuries if the cushion of the passenger seat or the consult your Vauxhall Authorised 3 components are triggered. covers of the deployable anti-roll bars . Repairer. z z z Do not place any objects between the Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to The speeds, directions of movement and airbag systems/anti-roll bar covers 3 clean the steering wheel, instrument deformation properties of the vehicles, and the occupants. Risk of injury. panel, front seat backrests, roof frame and the properties of the obstacle and seat cushion of the front passenger concerned, determine the severity of the 9 Warning seat. Do not use any aggressive cleaning accident and triggering of the airbags. agents. The degree of damage to your vehicle Never carry child restraint systems or z Only protective covers which are and the resulting repair costs alone are other objects on your lap - risk of fatal approved for your vehicle with side not indicative that the criteria for injury. airbag 3 may be fitted on the front triggering of the airbags were met. seats. When fitting the protective covers, z Do not make any modifications to z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to make sure that the airbag units on the components of the airbag systems or the hang up light articles of clothing or coat outboard sides of the front seat anti-roll bars 3 as this would render the hangers. Do not place any objects in the backrests are not covered. vehicle unroadworthy. pockets of the hanging items – risk of z The airbag systems are triggered injury. independently of each other based on 9 Warning z The control electronics of the airbag the severity of the accident and the type The systems can be triggered abruptly systems, belt tensioners and deployable of impact. The side airbag system 3 and and cause injury if they are handled anti-roll bars 3 are located in the centre the curtain airbag system 3 are improperly. console area. Do not store any magnetic triggered together. objects in the area as they could cause z Astra TwinTop: The deployable anti-roll z malfunction. We recommend having the steering bars 3 are deployed together with the wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling front and side airbag systems 3 parts, the door seals, the handles and depending on the severity of the impact. the seats removed by your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Safety systems 127 z Applicable safety directives must always z In order to prevent malfunctions when be observed when disposing of the using a Vauxhall child restraint system vehicle. For this reason, disposal should with transponders 3 on the front be performed by an authorised recycling passenger seat, no objects (e.g. plastic company. We recommend that you sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be consult your Vauxhall Authorised placed under the child restraint system. Repairer. z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should 9 Warning only travel on the rear seats. This does Child restraint systems as well as other not apply to children who are travelling objects must never be carried on the lap in child restraint systems with of passengers; risk of fatal injury. If transponders 3. carried in this way, child restraint systems z In vehicles with seat occupancy with transponders 3 in vehicles with seat recognition 3, do not place any heavy occupancy recognition 3 could lead to 3 objects on the front passenger seat front passenger airbag systems not Use of child restraint systems on the otherwise the airbag systems for the being triggered in the event of an front passenger seat in vehicles front passenger seat may be triggered in accident. with airbag systems, but the event of an accident. without seat occupancy recognition 3 z In vehicles with seat occupancy 9 Warning recognition 3, to prevent malfunctions do not use protective covers or seat No child restraint system 3 may be cushions on the front passenger seat. installed on front passenger seat. Danger to life.

Versions with front passenger airbag can be identified by the word AIRBAG over the glove compartment and the warning sticker on the side of the instrument panel, visible when the passenger door is open - see Fig. 17118 A.

6 128 Safety systems

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition are identified by a sticker on the lower panel of the front passenger seat – see Fig. 17116 T.

The side airbag system3 is identified by Use of child restraint systems 3 on front the word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of passenger seat in vehicles the front seat backrests. with airbag systems and 3 Seat occupancy recognition 3 – page 124. seat occupancy recognition 9 Warning

Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can be fitted on the front passenger seats. Use of systems without transponders poses a risk of fatal injury. Safety systems 129

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition Vauxhall child restraint systems with Mounting brackets 3 for ISOFIX can also be identified by control indicator transponders 3 can be identified by a child restraint systems y in the instrument panel. If control sticker on the child restraint system – see y The brackets located between the backrest indicator illuminates for approx. 4 figure. and seat cushion are used for mounting seconds when the ignition is switched on, ISOFIX child restraint systems. the vehicle is equipped with seat occupancy recognition – page 124. Please follow the instructions accompanying the ISOFIX child restraint The seat occupancy recognition system system. detects Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 and deactivates the Only ISOFIX child restraint systems front and side airbag systems 3 for the approved for the vehicle may be used. We front passenger seat. The curtain airbag recommend that you consult your Vauxhall system 3 remains activated. For seat Authorised Repairer. occupancy recognition see page 124. 130 Safety systems

3 Child restraint system Permissible options for fitting a child safety seat1) The Vauxhall child restraint system is designed specifically for your Vauxhall and Weight and On On On thus provides optimum safety for your child age class2) front outer rear seats centre rear seat3) in the event of impact. If a different child passenger seat safety seat is used, follow the manufacturers’ instructions for fitting and Group 0: use. up to 10 kg or approx. The country in which you are travelling 10 months 1 may not permit the use of child restraint B , + U, + U systems on certain seats. Always comply Group 0+: with the local or national regulations. up to 13 kg or approx. Selecting the right system 2 years Your child should travel facing backwards in the car for as long as possible. A child Group I: has a very weak cervical spinal column and 9 to18 kg in the event of an accident is less likely to or approx. B2, + U, + U suffer injury in a rearward-facing, semi- 8 months to 4 lying position than if seated upright. years 9 Warning Group II: 15 to 25 kg Never carry child restraint systems on or approx. your lap, risk of fatal injury. 3 to 7 years X U U Group III: 22 to 36 kg or approx. 6 to 12 years

1) For reasons of safety, we recommend that the child safety seat be installed on one of the outer rear seats. 2) We recommend the use of each system until the child reaches the upper weight limit. 3) Not on Astra TwinTop. Safety systems 131

B1 = Limited, only with seat occupancy U = Universal suitability in conjunction Note recognition and Vauxhall child with three-point seat belt. z Children under 12 years or under 150 cm restraint system with transponders. + = Vehicle seat with ISOFIX mounting tall should only travel in an appropriate If the child restraint system is being available. When mounting with child safety seat. secured using a three-point seat ISOFIX, only ISOFIX child restraint z When transporting children, use the child belt, move seat height adjustment 3 systems that have been approved restraint systems suitable for the child’s to uppermost position. Move front for the vehicle may be used. We weight. passenger seat as far back as recommend your Vauxhall z Ensure correct installation of child possible and move front passenger Authorised Repairer. restraint system, see the instructions seat belt anchorage point to lowest X = No child restraint system permitted enclosed with the system. position. in this weight class. z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint B2 = Limited, only with seat occupancy system can be wiped clean. recognition and Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders. z Do not stick anything on the child restraint systems and do not cover them If the child restraint system is being with any other materials. secured using a three-point seat belt, move seat height adjustment 3 z Only allow the child to enter and exit on to uppermost position. Move front the side of the vehicle facing away from passenger seat as far back as the road. possible so that vehicle safety belt z A child restraint system which has been runs from anchorage point towards subjected to stress in an accident must the front. be replaced. z Secure or remove child restraint systems carried in the vehicle when not in use. 132 Safety systems

Rollover protection system 3 The Astra TwinTop is equipped with rollover protection with reinforced windscreen frame and anti-roll bars behind the rear seat head restraints. Depending on the variant, the anti-roll bars are either fixed or deploy automatically in the event of an impact of a certain severity. The subsequent description only regards the variant with automatically deployed anti- roll bars 3.

In the event of a rollover, the anti-roll bars Control indicator v for anti-roll bars deploy upwards in a matter of The deployable anti-roll bars are milliseconds. They also deploy together monitored electronically together with the with the front and side airbag systems 3, belt tensioners and the airbag systems. helping to optimise occupant protection. Their operational readiness is indicated by v The system deploys whether the roof is control indicator in the instrument panel. open or closed. Roof operation is not When the ignition is switched on, the possible if the anti-roll bars are extended. control indicator illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go out after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in or deployment of the anti-roll bars, belt tensioners and airbag systems – page 113. The systems may fail to trigger in the event of an accident. Deployment of the anti-roll bars is indicated by continuous illumination of v. Safety systems 133

Have the cause of the fault remedied. We Note recommend that you consult your Vauxhall z Do not place any objects on the covers of Authorised Repairer. the anti-roll bars behind the head restraints. They would be propelled 9 Warning through the vehicle in an uncontrolled fashion should the anti-roll bars deploy. The roof cannot be closed or opened if Such objects could also prevent the anti- the anti-roll bars are extended. The anti- roll bars from extending. roll bars must first be retracted. z Do not operate the roof while the anti- If an attempt is made to operate the roof roll bars are extended. Parts of the roof while the anti-roll bars are extended, a could be damaged during such continuous signal will sound as a operation. warning. z Deployment of the anti-roll bars is indicated by illumination of control Extended anti-roll bars indicator v. can be retracted (e.g. in order to close the roof after a collision). z Manually retracted anti-roll bars will not deploy in the event of a collision. Press the lever between the rods of an anti- roll bar to unlock the system. Push the anti- z After deployment, the anti-roll bar roll bar all the way down until it engaged. system must be serviced immediately. Fit the cover. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Repeat the procedure on the other anti-roll bar. Control indicator v , however, will remain illuminated and the anti-roll bars will not deploy in the event of another collision. 134 Safety systems

Exterior mirrors Automatic anti-dazzle Hazard warning flashers For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior interior mirror 3 The hazard warning lights switch on mirrors will swing out of their normal Dazzle at night is automatically reduced. automatically when the airbags are mounting position if they are bumped with triggered, and the central locking unlocks With the ignition off, the mirror does not sufficient force. Reposition the mirror by all doors. Switch off hazard warning lights dim. applying slight pressure to the mirror with button ¨. housing. Setting – page 6. Aspherical exterior mirror 3 Sun visors, glove compartment increases the field of view. Estimating the The mirror covers in the sun visors and the distance away of vehicles following you is glove compartment should be closed whilst only possible to a limited extent because of driving. slight distortion. Safety systems 135

Head restraints Safety accessories 3 Do not attach objects or components that The wide range of Vauxhall accessories are not approved for your vehicle to the allows you to equip your vehicle as you head restraints, since they can reduce the desire. In addition to safety accessories, protection provided by the head restraints items for improving comfort and a and could be catapulted uncontrollably complete range of vehicle care products, through the vehicle in the event of hard there are many articles which will be of braking or an accident. great value to you when needed. "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" guarantee high quality and accurate fit. Your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be happy to advise you, for example with regard to: z Active head restraints 3 Vauxhall child restraint systems, z In the event of a rear-end impact, the Tow ropes, z active head restraints tilt forwards slightly. Tow rods, z The head is more effectively supported by Jump leads, z the head restraint and the danger of Spare bulb kit, z hyperextension in the area of the cervical Spare fuse kit z vertebra is reduced. Halogen fog lights z Mud flaps Active head restraints are identified by the z Warning triangle lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint z First-aid kit (cushion) guide sleeves. 136 Lighting

Versions with daytime running lights 3 : Lighting Parking lights are on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to 7 or AUTO. Dipped beam is on when the engine is running. The daytime running lights switch off when Automatic dipped beam activation 3 137 the ignition is switched off. Fog lights > 3...... 137 Fog tail light r ...... 137 Follow the regulations of the country in Turn signals, hazard warning flashers 137 which you are driving when using daytime running lights and fog lights 3. Reversing lights...... 137 Headlight range adjustment ?...... 138 Driving abroad – page 142. Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) .. 139 Door-to-door light function ...... 140 Parking lights 3 ...... 140 Exterior lights Instrument illumination , Information Turn light switch: display illumination...... 140 7 = Off Courtesy light...... 141 8 = Parking lights Puddle light 3 ...... 142 9 = Dipped beam, main beam Battery discharge protection...... 142 Dipped beam, main beam and headlight Light covers...... 142 flash – see page 15. Headlights when driving abroad ...... 142 In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights and number plate lights are also on. Control indicator 8 – page 40. If the ignition is switched off with the dipped beam or main beam on, the parking lights illuminate. Lighting 137

Fog tail light r On = Press r r illuminates in instrument panel Off = Press r again or switch ignition or light off The fog tail light can only be switched on both the ignition and dipped beam/ parking lights are on. The vehicle fog tail light are deactivated when towing. Turn signals, hazard warning flashers Automatic dipped beam Fog lights > 3 – page 15. activation 3 On = Press >> illuminates Light switch to AUTO : Dipped beam in instrument panel Reversing lights comes on automatically when the engine is Off = Press > again or Come on when reverse gear is engaged running if outside light conditions warrant switch ignition or light off and ignition is switched on. such. The fog lights can only be switched on The exterior lights switch off when the when both the ignition and lights are on. ignition is switched off. For reasons of safety, the light switch should always remain in the AUTO position. 138 Lighting

Vehicles without level control system Automatic headlight range adjustment 3 z Front seats occupied = 0 On vehicles with Xenon headlights, the range of the headlights is adjusted z All seats occupied = 1 automatically based on vehicle load. z All seats occupied and luggage compartment load =2 z Driver’s seat occupied and luggage compartment load =3

Vehicles with level control system z Front seats occupied = 0 z All seats occupied = 1 z All seats occupied and Headlight range adjustment ? luggage compartment load =1 3 Manual headlight range adjustment z Driver’s seat occupied and With dipped beam switched on, adjust luggage compartment load =2 headlight range in four steps to suit vehicle load. Turn wheel against resistance and click it to the required position. Correct adjustment of the headlight range reduces dazzle for other road users. Automatic level control system 3, – page 220. Lighting 139

Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 Curve lighting Control indicator B for adaptive driving (AFL) The Xenon light beam pivots based on lights improves lighting in curves (curve lighting) steering wheel position and speed (from Illuminated: Fault in system. The system is on vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlight approx. 6 mph /10 km/h). not ready for operation. system. The headlights shine at an angle of up to If the cornering light swivelling device fails, 15 ° to the right or left of the direction of the relevant dipped beam is switched off. travel. The corresponding fog light is Motorway lighting automatically switched on for reasons of At higher speeds and continuous straight safety. ahead travel, the dipped beam Consult a workshop. We recommend your automatically raises slightly, thereby Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. increasing headlight range. If control indicator B flashes for approx. 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the headlights have been set to symmetrical dipped beam; see "Headlights when driving abroad" on page 142. 140 Lighting

Door-to-door light function Parking lights 3 Instrument illumination , Dipped beam and reversing lights 3 light The front parking light and tail light of one Information display illumination for around 30 seconds after the driver exits side of the vehicle can be activated when Comes on when ignition is switched on. the vehicle and closes his door. parking: Brightness can be adjusted when the To activate 1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3, exterior lights are on: Push to release knob 1. Switch off ignition. 2. Ignition off k and then turn it clockwise or 2. Remove ignition key. 3. anticlockwise and hold until the desired 3. Move turn signal stalk all the way up brightness is obtained. 3. Open driver’s door. (right parking light) or down (left parking Display mode 3 – page 58. 4. Pull turn signal stalk toward steering light). wheel. An acoustic signal sounds and control O 5. Close driver’s door. indicator illuminates briefly in the instrument panel to indicate activation. If the driver’s door is left open, the lights will go out after two minutes. To switch it off, switch on the ignition or move the turn signal stalk in the opposite Door-to-door lighting can be deactivated direction. by inserting the key in the starter switch or by pulling the turn signal stalk toward the steering wheel again while the driver’s door is open. Lighting 141

Courtesy light Front reading lights 3 Courtesy lights and Automatic interior light Left and right reading lights are rear reading lights 3 Comes on automatically when the vehicle is individually operable. With ignition on: Centre switch position: The rear courtesy unlocked with the radio remote control, on: press = button a light comes on together with the front one when a door is opened or when the key is when a door is open. off: press=button a again removed from the starter switch after the The rear reading lights on the left and right ignition is switched off. can be switched on separately. With Goes off automatically after a delay when ignition on: the doors are closed or immediately when On = Switch position I the ignition is switched on or the doors are Off = Switch position0 locked. Front courtesy light To operate manually from inside when the doors are closed: On = Press button c Off = Press button c again 142 Lighting

Entry lighting 3 Battery discharge protection Do as follows to prevent glare: After unlocking the vehicle, the instrument To prevent the battery from becoming Vehicles with and switch lighting come on for a few discharged, the courtesy light, reading halogen headlight system or seconds. lights, luggage compartment lighting and Xenon headlight system 3 Door handle lighting 3 glove compartment lighting switch off Have the headlights adjusted by a When the exterior lights are on, the interior automatically 10 minutes after the ignition workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall front door handles are illuminated. is switched off. Authorised Repairer. Illuminated mirror in the Vehicles with adaptive forward lighting 3 sun visors 3 Light covers (AFL) The lighting switches on when the cover is The inside of the light covers may mist up 1. Pull and hold stalk for main beam on opened. briefly in poor, wet and cold weather steering wheel (headlight flash) conditions, in heavy rain or after washing. Glove compartment lighting The mist disappears quickly by itself; to 2. Switch on ignition. on when lid is open. help, switch on the lights. 3. After approx. 3 seconds, an acoustic Cigarette lighter signal sounds and then AFL control and ashtray illumination 3 Headlights when driving abroad indicator B flashes approx. 4 seconds. Comes on when ignition is switched on. The asymmetrical dipped beam increases After the switch, AFL control indicator B Luggage compartment lighting the field of vision on the passenger side of flashes for 4 seconds each time the ignition Comes on when the boot lid/tailgate is the lane. is switched on. opened. This causes glare for oncoming traffic if the To return to asymmetrical dipped beam, Automatically regulated centre console vehicle is driven in countries where traffic pull and hold the main beam stalk again, lighting 3 drives on the opposite side of the road. switch on the ignition and wait for the Spotlight in housing of interior mirror. acoustic signal. AFL control indicator B Daylight-dependent, automatically will then discontinue flashing. regulated centre console lighting with Control indicator B – page 42. ignition switched on. Puddle light 3 After unlocking the vehicle, the number plate lights come on for a few seconds. Windows, Sun Roof 143

Windows, Sun Roof 9 Warning

Take care when operating the electric windows 3 and the sun roof 3. Risk of injury, particularly to children. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly. If there are children on the rear seat, switch on the child safety system 3 for the electric windows. Keep a close watch on the windows and sun roof when closing them. Ensure that Electric windows 3...... 143 nothing becomes trapped in them as 3 Panoramic windscreen 3 ...... 146 they move. Operated via two or four switches in the driver’s door handle. The front switches are Sun roof 3 ...... 146 Electric windows 3 for the driver and front passenger doors. The rear switches 3 are for the rear doors. The electric windows can be used Additional switches are located in the front z with ignition on, passenger door and rear doors 3. z within 5 minutes of switching ignition For incremental operation, briefly pull or off 3, press the switch. For automatic opening or z within 5 minutes of switching ignition key closing, pull or press the switch longer. Pull to position 1. or press the switch again to stop the movement. Stand-by after switching on the ignition ends when the driver’s door is opened. 144 Windows, Sun Roof

Safety function Child safety system for rear windows 3 Central switch for electric If the window glass encounters resistance Switch z between the rear switches in the windows, Astra TwinTop above the middle of the window during driver’s door handle Button $ or " in the roof console automatic closing, it is immediately z Forward (red field visible): Rear door Press button $ : all windows are closed stopped and the window opened again. switches non-operational Press button $ : all windows are opened In the event of difficulty due to frost or the z Rearward (green field visible): Rear door like, press the relevant window switch switches operational several times until the window is closed. Windows, Sun Roof 145

Overload If the windows are repeatedly operated at short intervals, the power supply is briefly cut off. The system is protected by fuses in the fuse box – page 266. Fault The windows cannot be automatically opened or closed. Activate electronic windows as follows: 1. Close doors. 2. Switch on ignition. Operating windows from outside 3 Open&Start system with 3. Window completely open. 3 Depending on the equipment level of the electronic key 4. Close the window and hold the button 3 q vehicle , the windows of vehicles with Hold down button of radio remote depressed at least 5 seconds. electric windows in all doors 3 can be control to open. To close, hold down button opened or closed from outside using the p or touch sensor in door handle for 5. Repeat for each window. radio remote control. longer. The electronic key must be Radio remote control with recognised within the external reception mechanical key range. It is advisable for the driver to keep Hold button q or p on the radio remote the electronic key on his person. control depressed until all windows have Stand-by after switching on the ignition opened or completely closed. ends when the driver’s door is opened. 146 Windows, Sun Roof

Panoramic windscreen 3 Close the roof lining Sun roof 3 Open the roof lining Move the roof lining forward to a suitable Operated via rocker switches in the roof Turn the handle to the right and move the position. When moved all the way forward, console when the ignition is switched on. the roof lining engages in position. roof lining rearward to a suitable position. For incremental operation, briefly press the Note button. For automatic opening or closing, Close the sun visors before sliding the roof press the button longer. lining. Windows, Sun Roof 147

To raise: Note When the roof is closed, press button ü. z If the top of the roof is wet, raise roof, The roof is tilted in the rear. allow water to run off and then open To open: roof. Press button ü again from the tilted z When using a roof rack, check the position. The roof opens to its stop. clearance of the sun roof to avoid To close: damage. Press button d . Overload For reasons of safety, the roof closes from If the system is overloaded, the power its open position to approx. 20 cm. Hold supply is automatically cut off for a short button d depressed to close the roof time. completely. The system is protected by fuses in the fuse box – page 266. Sunblind Fault Used to reduce sun penetration into the If the sun roof and sunblind do not operate interior when the sun roof is closed. properly, activate electronics as follows: The sunblind opens when the sun roof 1. Switch on ignition. opens. 2. Close the sun roof and hold button d To open: depressed at least 10 seconds. Press button G. The sunblind opens to its 3. Close sunblind and hold button H stop. depressed at least 10 seconds. To close: Press button H For reasons of safety, the blind closes from its open position to approx. 20 cm. Hold button d depressed to close completely. 148 TwinTop

With TwinTop, a convertible hardtop, Astra TwinTop unites the benefits of a coupe with those of a convertible. 9 Warning

Take care when operating the convertible hardtop. Risk of injury. Monitor the action zone above, to the side and to the rear of the vehicle during roof operation. Make sure that nothing could become pinched. Make sure no one is in the action zone of the roof or boot lid during roof operation. Risk of injury. TwinTop TwinTop...... 148 Check the amount height, length and Operating the convertible hardtop Rollover protection system ...... 152 width of available space before Stand-by with ignition key in lock from Luggage compartment...... 153 operating the roof, e. g. in a garage, position 1, or for Open&Start-System 3 Wind deflector 3...... 154 parking garage or when a bicycle rack is switch on ignition. fitted. Requirements: Vehicle passengers should be informed z Vehicle is stationary or driving no more accordingly. than 20 mph (30 km/h). Before leaving the vehicle, remove the z Luggage compartment blind is closed ignition key in order to prevent and engaged - see above and page 104. unauthorised operation of the windows z Boot lid is closed. and sun roof. If any of the requirements are not fulfilled, a warning buzzer sounds when the switch is actuated and the roof does not open or close. TwinTop 149

To open the roof With the vehicle stopped, the roof can be To close the roof There must be no objects in front of the opened using the radio remote control 3 . There must be no objects in the pivot area rear window or in the pivot area of the roof Unlock the vehicle. Press button q again of the roof and boot lid. and boot lid. and keep pressed until the roof has opened Hold button < in the roof console Hold button > in the roof console fully and the boot lid has closed. depressed until the roof and boot lid are depressed until the roof is completely open During operation with the remote control, completely closed. and the boot lid is closed. the door windows are opened completely. An acoustic signal sounds at the end of the An acoustic signal sounds at the end of the closing procedure. opening procedure. Open the door windows slightly before Open the door windows slightly before closing the roof. If button < is pressed opening the roof. If button > is pressed again after the acoustic signal sounds, the again after the acoustic signal sounds, the door windows will close. door windows will close. 6 150 TwinTop

Indicator and warning buzzers z Continuous warning buzzer during roof z Indicator buzzer upon completed operation if the anti-roll bars 3 have opening or closing of the convertible been triggered. hardtop. z Continuous warning buzzer starting one z Indicator buzzer upon completed raising minute before the end of the 9-minute or lowering of the electric luggage standby time with the roof in an compartment loading aid. intermediate position. z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed z Continuous warning buzzer starting one during roof operation. minute before the end of the 9-minute z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully standby time with the loading aid in a opening during operation of the luggage raised position. compartment loading aid. z Continuous warning buzzer when closing z Gong tone during roof operation if the boot lid if the lowering process of the With the vehicle stopped, the roof can be vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (30 km/h). electric load aid is not complete or was closed using the radio remote control 3 . interrupted. z Gong tone when vehicle speed exceeds Lock the vehicle. Press button p again and 20 mph (30 km/h) if the roof is not fully keep pressed until the roof and boot lid open or closed. have closed completely. z Three gong tones during roof or loading aid operation if the luggage compartment blind is not attached. z Three gong tones during roof operation if outside temperature is below –20 °C, vehicle battery voltage is too low or the system is overloaded. TwinTop 151

Note z The roof can be held in an intermediate Fault z Do not open the luggage compartment position for 9 minutes to facilitate The automatic drive of the roof is only until the acoustic signal indicating the cleaning of roof spaces. This is done by operational if the roof is in the proper open end of the roof opening or closing disengaging the actuation switch. One or closed position. procedure has sounded. minute before the end of this period, a Check if: z continuous buzzer sounds as a warning The luggage compartment blind must z The luggage compartment blind is always be closed during roof operation. that the hold period is almost over and the roof could start to move. engaged in the closed position z There must be no one at the covers z z The boot lid is completely closed behind the rear head restraints. Activating the roof on uneven ground can lead to malfunctions and damage. z Outside temperature is above –20 °C z There must be no objects in the pivot area or the roof or on the covers behind z There is sufficient battery voltage the rear head restraints. z There is a system overload z The roof can only be operated at If the automatic drive is not operational, temperatures above –20 °C. If the two persons are required to manually close temperature is below this limit, a gong the roof. See the accompanying will sound three times when roof instructions for Astra TwinTop. We operation is requested. recommend that you seek professional assistance. 152 TwinTop

Rollover protection system To optimise safety in the event of a rollover, the Astra TwinTop is equipped with reinforced windscreen frame and anti- roll bars behind the rear sat head restraints. The anti-roll bars are fixed or deployable depending on vehicle variant.

Fixed anti-roll bars Deployable anti-roll bars 3 are secured to the vehicle bodywork. are located between the rear head restraints and the boot lid in such a way that they are out of sight. In the event of a rollover, head-on collision or side impact, the anti-roll bars deploy upwards within milliseconds. The convertible roof must not be operated if the anti-roll bars have been deployed. A continuous warning will sound if the switch is actuated. The airbag control indicator v illuminates if the anti-roll bars have been deployed. Manual retraction of the anti-roll bars – page 132. Further information, – page 133. TwinTop 153

Blockage of boot lid on closure 3 To avoid damage to the open roof, boot lid or load, the boot lid can only be closed if the electric load aid is in the lower end position – page 104.

Luggage compartment Unblocking on failure of electric drive The roof can only be opened if the load in Push locking lever forward as shown in the the luggage compartment does not figure. exceed the height of the luggage compartment blind or protrude sideways. The load height marked in the figure must not be exceeded. The luggage compartment blind must be flat; objects below it must not press it upwards. Otherwise the roof and load may be damaged. Electrically operated loading aid for the luggage compartment – page 104. Luggage compartment blind – page 104. 154 TwinTop

Wind deflector 3 With the wind deflector installed turbulence, draughts and noise in the passenger compartment are reduced when the roof is open. The rear seats cannot be occupied when the wind deflector is in place. Do not place any objects on the wind deflector.

With tyre repair set 3 , the wind deflector is Fitting folded down into a storage Take the wind deflector from the luggage compartment 3 in the luggage compartment. compartment below the loading floor Expand the collapsed wind deflector as cover. illustrated. For the version with spare wheel 3, the wind deflector is folded away in the luggage compartment. TwinTop 155

Join together the unfolded ends of the wind Insert the guide clips of the wind deflector Pull the toggle of the right and left locking deflector: press in the pin at the slider, in the seat belt recesses between the rear pin and turn to lock. Straighten out the guide the hinge over the pin and release head restraints. wind deflector, turn the toggle back and the slider so that the pin engages in the engage the locking pin in the recess in the hinge. side trim. 156 TwinTop

Removing The wind deflector may never protrude Removal in reverse order, store wind upwards or sideways from the luggage deflector fully folded in the luggage compartment, see marked loading height, compartment: see page 153, Figure 17973 T. for tyre repair set 3, in the compartment below the loading floor cover. - for version with spare wheel 3, place in the luggage compartment.

The wind deflector can be folded back when not in use. If the wind deflector is folded and the rear seats are unoccupied, the wind deflector can remain mounted in the vehicle when the roof is closed. Climate control 157 Climate control

Air vents ...... 159 n Cooled glove compartment 3 ...... 159 Heating and ventilation system, The buttons for cooling and air recirculation 4 are only found on Heated rear window, heated exterior air conditioning system 3 versions with optional air conditioning mirrors 3 ...... 160 Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 are system 3. Heated seats 3...... 160 combined into one unit that is designed to Heating and ventilation system ...... 161 provide comfort regardless of the season, Air conditioning system 3 Air conditioning system 3...... 164 weather or outside temperature. – pages 164, 166. Automatic air conditioning system 3 166 When cooling 3 is activated, the air is Electronic climate control system 3 ... 171 cooled and dried. Air intake ...... 177 The heating unit heats the air as required in Pollen filter ...... 177 all operating modes depending on the Note...... 177 position of the temperature switch. The air Maintenance ...... 177 supply can be adjusted to suit requirements by means of the fan. 158 Climate control

The set values appear on the information display. Electronic climate control system – page 171.

Automatic air conditioning Electronic system 3 climate control system 3 Provides a comfortable interior regardless Offers the greatest comfort in the vehicle of the weather, outside temperature or interior regardless of the conditions season. outside. When an interior temperature is set with To ensure a uniform and comfortable the temperature control, the temperature climate in the vehicle, the temperature of and amount of inflowing air are inflowing air, air-flow rate and air automatically regulated. A uniform, distribution are automatically adapted comfortable climate in the vehicle is based on the climate conditions outside thereby automatically obtained based on the vehicle and the current temperature of outside climate conditions. the vehicle interior. Automatic air conditioning system – page 166. Climate control 159

Air vents To close the vent, turn the vertical adjuster Cooled glove compartment 3 Pleasant ventilation to the interior wheel fully up. The symbol 0 appears. The Cooled air is fed into the glove controlled by the position of the slats of the vent remain open although the compartment through a nozzle. air supply is closed. temperature switch. If glove compartment cooling is not To increase the air supply, turn the fan all Windscreen defroster nozzles (2) required, slide the slider forward. the way up and set the air distribution Air distribution switch to I or J : switch to M or L. Air flows onto windscreen and side windows. Centre and side air vents (1) Vents open: Vertical knurled wheel down. Additional vents Adjust the flow of air by turning the below the windscreen and door windows horizontal knurled wheel. and in the front footwell. 160 Climate control

Heating works with the engine running and is switched off automatically after around 15 minutes. Astra TwinTop: The headed rear window and heated exterior mirrors 3 are deactivated when the roof is open. Vehicles with diesel particle filter 3 : the heated rear window is automatically switched on during particle filter cleaning.

Heated rear window, Heated seats 3 heated exterior mirrors 3 Operation with ignition switched on: With the ignition on, the rear screen and Press button ß one or more times to set the exterior mirror heating is switched on by desired heat output. The control indicator pressing button Ü: in the button indicates which of the three LED Ü lights: rear screen and exterior heating levels is active. mirror heating. We do not recommend prolonged use of LED Ü does not light: rear screen and the highest level for people with sensitive exterior mirror heating is switched off. skin. Deactivation: Press button ß repeatedly until the control indicator goes out. Seat heating is operational when the engine is running. General information, as well as information on air intake, air outlet, pollen filter and maintenance, – page 177. Climate control 161

Heating and ventilation system Centre rotary switch: Temperature Right-hand rotary switch: air flow Left-hand rotary switch: Air distribution Turn right = warm Four fan speeds: L to head area via adjustable Turn left = cold x = Off air vents and to foot well 4 = Maximum air flow M to headroom via adjustable The rate of air flow is determined by the air vents fan. The fan should therefore also be switched on during a journey. l To the windscreen and front door windows J to the windscreen, front door windows, to foot well K to foot well Intermediate settings are possible. Open the air vents when the switch is set to L or M. 162 Climate control

Heating The comfort and general well-being of the The amount of heat is dependent on the vehicle occupants are to a large extent coolant temperature and is thus not fully dependent on a suitable ventilation and attained until the engine is warm. heating setting. For rapid warming of the passenger To achieve a stratification of temperature compartment: with the pleasant effect of "cool head and z Set air distribution switch to desired warm feet", turn the rotary switch for air position, preferably position J distribution to K or J, set temperature – page 161. rotary switch to any position (in the mid- z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as range with stratification of temperature). far as it will go. z Set the fan to speed 3. z Open air vents Ventilation Vehicles with Quickheat 3 : depending on z For maximum ventilation in head area: the outside temperature and the engine set air distribution switch to M and open temperature the passenger compartment all vents is heated up more quickly using an z Set the temperature to the desired auxiliary electric heater. setting. The auxiliary electric heater switches itself z Set the fan to the desired setting. on automatically. z For ventilation to foot well: Set air distribution switch to K, z For simultaneous ventilation to the head area and the foot well: Set air distribution switch to L. Climate control 163

z Set fan to 3 or 4, z Activate heated rear window Ü, z Open side air vents as required and direct them towards door windows. z For simultaneous footwell heating, set air distribution switch to J.

Heating the foot well Demisting and defrosting windows z K Set air distribution switch to , 9 Warning z Set the temperature switch in the right- hand zone. Failure to follow the instructions could z Switch on fan. lead to misted or icy windows and accidents stemming from impaired visibility.

Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp weather, damp clothing or low outside temperatures: z Move air distribution switch to I. z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as far as it will go (warm). 164 Climate control

Air conditioning system 3 As a supplement to the heating and ventilation system, the air conditioning system cools and dehumidifies (dries) inflowing air. If cooling or dehumidification is not desired, switch off cooling in order to save fuel. Cooling switches off automatically at low outside temperatures.

Cooling n Air recirculation system 4 Operate only with the engine on and the The recirculation switch 4 is used to set fan running: the ventilation system to recirculation Press On= n mode (control indicator in switch). n Press off= again If fumes or unpleasant odours penetrate Control indicator in button. from outside: temporarily switch on air recirculation system 4. To increase the cooling power at high outside temperatures, temporarily switch on the air recirculation system. Climate control 165

The air recirculation system minimises the entry of outside air. The humidity increases, and the windows can mist up. The quality of the passenger compartment air deteriorates which may cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy. Air distribution to l : the air recirculation system is automatically switched off to speed up window demisting and prevent fogging.

Comfort setting Maximum cooling 3 z Set cooling n as desired. Open windows and sun roof briefly so that warm air can escape rapidly. z Air recirculation system 4 off. z Cooling n on. z Set air distribution switch to M or L. z Activate recirculation system 4 z Set temperature switch as desired. z Set air distribution switch to M. z Switch on fan at desired speed z Turn the temperature switch z Open or adjust vents as required. anticlockwise as far as it will go (cold) Temperature switch in centre of z Set fan to 4, adjustment range: warmer air will flow into z the foot well and cooler air into the upper Open all vents. zone, with warmer air coming from the side air vents and cooler air from the centre vents. 166 Climate control

z Cooling n on. Automatic air conditioning z Move air distribution switch to I. system 3 z Turn the temperature switch clockwise. Provides a uniformly comfortable interior regardless of the weather, outside z Set fan to 4, temperature or season. z Open side air vents as required and To ensure a constant and comfortable direct them towards door windows. climate in the vehicle, the temperature of z Activate heated rear window Ü, the inflowing air and the air-flow rate are changed automatically based on climate z Open side air vents as required and conditions outside the vehicle. direct them towards the side windows. Temperature changes due to external influences, such as direct sunlight, are automatically compensated. Window demisting and de-icing 9 Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could lead to misted or icy windows and accidents stemming from impaired visibility.

Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp weather, damp clothing or low outside temperatures: Climate control 167

Automatic mode Air distribution setting Temperature preset Basic setting for maximum comfort: L to head area via adjustable Set the rotary switch to a value between z Set fan switch to A air vents and to foot well 17 °C and 27 °C. Intermediate settings are M possible. z Set air distribution switch to desired to headroom via adjustable position - see next column air vents The selected temperature is maintained. z Use rotary switch to set temperature l To the windscreen and For reasons of comfort, temperature can to 22 °C (a higher or lower temperature front door windows only be changed in small increments. can be set as desired) J to the windscreen, There is no temperature control for settings z Air conditioning compressor activation front door windows, below 17 °C (all the way left) or – page 168, to foot well above 27 °C (all the way right). The air K to foot well conditioning system works at maximum z All front air vents open. If desired, the cooling or heating. rear vents also 3. Intermediate settings are possible. Deactivation of the air conditioning Open the air vents when the switch is compressor can reduce the level of comfort set to L or M. and safety – page 168. 168 Climate control

Air flow setting To activate/deactivate Manual air recirculation mode 1 - 4 Manual fan air conditioning compressor (cooling) n The air recirculation system prevents the speed setting. Operate only with the engine on and the entry of outside air and the air in the Intermediate settings are possible. fan running: passenger compartment is circulated. n A Automatic control Press On= Press button 4, control indicator in n of fan speed Press off= again button. x Fan off Control indicator in the button. The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air Fan speed is regulated to provide the rate When cooling (AC compressor) is active, air recirculation mode. The quality of the of air flow necessary to maintain the pre- is cooled and dehumidified. If cooling or passenger compartment air deteriorates selected temperature. dehumidification is not desired, switch off which may cause the vehicle occupants to cooling in order to save fuel. feel drowsy. In operation without cooling Select automatic mode for the highest level the air humidity increases, so the windows of comfort. Cooling switches off automatically at low outside temperatures. may mist up. Consequently, manual air When the fan is off, the air conditioning recirculation should only be run for short compressor is also off. periods of time. To deactivate manual air recirculation: Press button 4 again. The control indicator in the button will go out. Climate control 169

Heating Vehicles with Quickheat 3 : depending on The amount of heat is dependent on the the outside temperature and the engine coolant temperature and is thus not fully temperature the passenger compartment attained until the engine is warm. is heated up more quickly using an For rapid warming of the passenger auxiliary electric heater. compartment: The auxiliary electric heater switches itself z Set the air distribution switch to the on automatically. desired position – page 161. The comfort and general well-being of the z Set the centre rotary switch to the vehicle occupants are to a large extent desired temperature. We recommend a dependent on a suitable ventilation and value of about 22 °C. heating setting. z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be To obtain a stratification of temperature in manually set: Set the rotary switch to the vehicle with the pleasant effect "cool Ventilation position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are head and warm feet", set the air z For maximum ventilation in head area: also possible. distribution switch to K or J, set the set air distribution switch to M and open temperature switch to about 22 °C and all vents. open the centre air vents. z For ventilation to foot well: Set air distribution switch to K, z For simultaneous ventilation to the head area and the foot well: set air distribution switch to L. z Set desired temperature z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be manually set: Set the rotary switch to position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are also possible. 170 Climate control

z Set temperature to maximum heating, i.e. turn the centre rotary switch all the way to the right (28 °C). z Switch on heated rear window U. Operation with cooling (air conditioning compressor) is not possible when outside temperatures are low. To switch off, press button V again; the automatic air conditioning system will operate at the settings selected previously.

Maximum cooling Window demisting and de-icing for very hot interior Open windows and sun roof 3 briefly so 9 Warning that warm air can escape rapidly. Failure to follow the instructions could z Cooling n on. lead to misted or icy windows and z Set air distribution switch to M. accidents stemming from impaired visibility. z Set the temperature switch to the desired temperature. Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp z Set fan switch to A. weather, damp clothing or low outside temperatures: z Open all vents. z Cooling n on. The automatic climate control system provides maximum cooling down to the set z Press button V : In switch position A , value. the fan automatically switches to the highest speed and air is directed to the At settings below 17 °C (rotary switch all windscreen. the way to the left), the system continually runs with maximum cooling. When the air conditioning compressor is running, air recirculation is switched on automatically. Climate control 171

Electronic climate control system 3 Provides a the greatest amount of comfort in the interior regardless of the weather, outside temperature or season. To ensure a constant and comfortable climate in the vehicle, the temperature of the inflowing air, the air-flow rate and the air distribution are changed automatically according to climatic conditions outside the vehicle. Temperature changes due to external influences, such as direct sunlight, are automatically compensated. Different settings are stored for each The automatic air recirculation system 3 Data is shown on the information display. remote control. Use of a remote control will has an air quality sensor to detect harmful Setting modifications are briefly shown in activate the settings associated with it. ambient gases, in which case it will switch the information display, superimposing Manual settings e.g. operating without automatically to recirculation. over the currently displayed menu. cooling and air distribution can be selected When set to automatic mode, the climate The display can vary according to the type using the menu – page 173. control system provides the optimal of presentation – page 46. When cooling (air conditioning settings for almost all conditions. If necessary, climate control system settings The settings in the climate control system compressor) is active, air is cooled and can be modified manually. are stored in the vehicle key when the dehumidified. vehicle is locked, see " Store personal The pollen filter removes dust, soot, pollen The climate control system is only settings in vehicle key " – page 68. and spores from the inflowing outside air. operational when the engine is running. Cooling (air conditioning compressor) switches off automatically at low outside temperatures. 172 Climate control

Switching off the AC compressor (Eco Automatic air recirculation mode 3 appears in display) can reduce comfort The ventilation system is set to recirculation and affect safety – page 174. mode and interior air is recirculated. All air vents are actuated automatically in The automatic air recirculation system has automatic mode. The air vents should an air quality sensor to detect harmful therefore always be open – page 159. gases in the outside air, in which case it will switch automatically to recirculation. If outside temperatures are low and cooling (air conditioning compressor) is switched off, automatic air recirculation is only available in a limited capacity so as to prevent the windows from misting. Activate recirculation manually if so desired. Automatic mode Switching automatic recirculation on or off Basic setting for maximum comfort: – page 176. z Press AUTO button. Manual recirculation mode – page 176. z Open all air vents. z Air conditioning compressor activation – page 174, z Set pre-selected temperature to 22 °C using left rotary knob. The temperature can be set higher or lower as desired. Climate control 173

Temperature preset Climate Air distribut. The left rotary knob can be used to set Air distribut. temperatures between 16 °C and 28 °C. AC For reasons of comfort, temperature can Autom. blower only be changed in small increments. Auto. recirc Vehicles with Quickheat 3 : depending on the outside temperature and the engine temperature the passenger compartment is heated up more quickly using an auxiliary electric heater. The auxiliary electric heater switches itself on automatically. If a temperature below 16 °C is set, Lo appears in the display: the climate control Manual settings Individual menu items are marked by system runs constantly at maximum Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or turning the centre knob and selected by cooling power. The temperature is not misted windows), the functions of the pressing it. Selecting certain menus by regulated. climate control system can be modified pressing the knob will open a submenu 3. manually. If a temperature above 28 °C is set, Hi To exit a menu, turn the centre knob left or appears in the display: the climate control Climate control system settings can be right to Return or Main and select. system runs constantly at maximum changed via the centre knob, the buttons heating power. The temperature is not and the menus depicted on the display. regulated. Press the centre knob to call up the menu. The menu for manual climate control system settings appears in the display. 174 Climate control

The air flow can be increased or decreased Climate by turning the right knob. Air distribut. To return to automatic mode: press AC Air conditioning V button or AUTO. Autom. blower on / off Heated rear window – page 160. Auto. recirc

Window demisting and de-icing Activating and deactivating air conditioning compressor 9 Warning If no cooling or dehumidification is required, switch the air conditioning Failure to follow the instructions could compressor off (maximum energy savings): lead to misted or icy windows and Mark menu item AC from the manual accidents stemming from impaired settings menu and select by pressing. Eco visibility. appears on the display. Inflowing air is neither cooled nor Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp dehumidified. This restricts the level of weather, damp clothing or low outside comfort provided by the electronic climate temperatures: control system. This may cause the Press V button. V appears in display: windows to mist up, for example. control indicator in button illuminates. To activate cooling: Select menu item AC The temperature and the air distribution from the manual settings menu and press are adjusted automatically, the fan runs at to activate cooling. a faster speed and the windows are rapidly cleared of ice and moisture. Climate control 175

Air distribut. Automatic blower

Strong Normal Weak

Air distribution Air flow Fan control in automatic mode 3 Press the centre knob. The possible air Turn right knob right or left. The selected Fan regulation in automatic mode can be distribution settings appear one after fan speed in indicated with x and the modified. another in the display. number in the display. Select menu item Automatic blower from Air distribution can also be set in the Air At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air the manual settings menu and select the distribut. menu: conditioning compressor) are switched off. desired fan control. Up Air distribution to windscreen To return to automatic mode: Press AUTO Depending on the setting, the maximum and front door windows button. air flow, and thereby the noise level, will Centre Air to vehicle occupants increase. via front adjustable air vents Down Air distribution to foot well Return to automatic air distribution: Deactivate corresponding setting or press button AUTO. 176 Climate control

Climate Air distribut. AC Automatic recirculation Autom. blower Residual air conditioning on Auto. recirc air control at bad outside air

Switching automatic recirculation 3 on Manual air recirculation mode Air conditioning with the engine not or off The air recirculation system prevents the running The automatic air recirculation system has entry of outside air and the air in the When the vehicle is stopped and the an air quality sensor to detect harmful passenger compartment is circulated. ignition off, the heat or cooling power still gases in the outside air, in which case it will Press button 4, the control indicator in in the system can be used to condition the switch automatically to recirculation. the button will illuminate. passenger compartment, for example when stopped at a level crossing. Select menu item Auto. recirc from the The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air manual settings menu and switch it on or recirculation mode. The quality of the Press button AUTO with the ignition off. off by pressing. passenger compartment air deteriorates Residual air conditioning on will appear Switch to manual air recirculation as which may cause the vehicle occupants to briefly in the display. necessary. feel drowsy. In operation without cooling The air conditioning will operate for a the air humidity increases, so the windows limited period of time. may mist up. Consequently, manual air To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO recirculation should only be run for short button. periods of time. To deactivate manual air recirculation: Press button 4 again. The control indicator in the button will go out. Climate control 177

Note Maintenance If the windscreen mists up during damp In order to ensure continuously efficient weather, temporarily set the system as performance, the air conditioning described under "Demisting and defrosting compressor 3 must be operated for a few the windows" – pages 163, 166 or 174. minutes once a month, irrespective of the Cooling 3 is most efficient when the weather and time of year. The climate windows are closed. If the interior is control system, if present, handles this extremely hot due to a long period in automatically while driving. Air strong sunlight, briefly open the windows conditioning compressor operation is not and sun roof 3 to allow the hot air to possible when outside temperatures are escape quickly. low. When cooling 3 (air conditioning If a fault occurs, consult a workshop. We compressor) is switched on condensation recommend your Vauxhall Authorised forms, which is expelled from the underside Repairer. Air intake of the vehicle. The air intakes in front of the windscreen in the engine compartment must be kept At least one air vent must be open while clear to allow air intake. Remove any cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is leaves, dirt or snow. on in order to prevent the evaporator from icing up due to lack of air movement. Pollen filter Cooling switches off automatically at low The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen outside temperatures. and spores from the air entering from Do not cover the sensor on the instrument outside. The active carbon layer 3 panel as this could cause the climate eliminates most odours and harmful control 3 system to malfunction. ambient gases from the air. Replace the pollen filter at the intervals given in the Service Booklet. 178 Easytronic

Easytronic Easytronic 3 The semi-automatic Easytronic transmission permits manual (manual mode) or automatic gear shifting (automatic mode), both with automatic clutch control. 9 Warning

Disregard of these instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life.

Transmission display ...... 178 Starting the engine...... 179 Transmission display Easytronic operation via the selector Shows the mode and current gear. lever...... 179 The display flashes for a few seconds when Move selector lever toward N...... 179 A, M or R is selected with the engine Starting off ...... 180 running and the foot brake not activated. Electronically controlled driving programmes...... 181 Winter programme T ...... 182 Kickdown...... 182 Braking assistance from engine ...... 183 "Rocking the car"...... 183 Manoeuvring the vehicle...... 183 Stopping the vehicle...... 184 Vehicle storage ...... 184 Fault...... 184 Interruption of power supply ...... 185 Easytronic 179

There is no need to select neutral before starting the engine. If a gear is engaged, the transmission automatically switches to neutral (N) before the engine starts when the foot brake is operated. This can lead to a slight delay in the starting process.

Starting the engine Easytronic operation via the When starting the engine, press the foot selector lever brake at the same time. The engine can only be started with the foot brake pressed. Always move the selector lever in the The gear display shows "N". If the foot appropriate direction as far as it will go. brake is not operated, the control indicator Upon release, it automatically returns to j lights and "N" flashes in the gear the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/ display, and the engine cannot be started. mode indicator in the transmission display. Also the vehicle cannot be started if all Move selector lever toward N brake lights have failed. Neutral. 180 Easytronic

It is also possible to start off without depressing the foot brake if the accelerator pedal is operated directly after movement of the selector lever. If there is no immediate acceleration or the foot brake is not depressed, no gear is engaged and "A" flashes. After a few seconds, the display resumes showing "N". Start off by repeating the previously described procedure. In Automatic mode, selection of other gears is automatic irrespective of driving conditions. Move selector lever toward A Starting off Switch between Automatic and Manual Move selector lever toward + or - Depress the foot brake, release the hand mode. + Shift to a higher gear. brake and move the selector lever to A , - Shift to a lower gear. + or -. Easytronic is in automatic mode and Manual gear shifting is possible in manual first gear is engaged (second gear if the mode. "M" and the currently engaged gear If a higher gear is selected when the Winter programme is active). "A1" appears appear in the transmission display. running speed is too low, or a lower gear in the transmission display ("A2" if the If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic when the speed is too high, no shift is Winter programme is active). will automatically shift to a lower gear even effected. This prevents the engine from running at too low or too high revs. The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot in Manual mode. This prevents the engine brake is released. from stalling. Gears can be skipped by moving the selector lever repeatedly at short intervals. Easytronic 181

If the vehicle is in automatic mode, on Electronically controlled driving movement of the selector lever to + or - programmes Easytronic shifts to manual mode and z By means of delayed gear changing changes up or down. "M" and the currently (higher engine speeds) following a cold engaged gear appear in the transmission start, the operating temperature display. programme in automatic mode quickly Move selector lever toward R and automatically brings the catalytic Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is converter to the temperature required stationary. for optimum pollutant reduction. Depress the foot brake, release the hand z Adaptive programmes automatically brake and move the selector lever to R. adapt gear shifting in automatic mode Reverse gear is engaged. "R" appears in to suit the driving conditions, such as if the transmission display. the vehicle is towing a caravan/trailer, The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot has a high payload, or is being driven on inclines. z When SPORT mode is engaged, shift brake is released. times are reduced and the transmission It is also possible to start off in reverse shifts at higher engine speeds (unless without depressing the foot brake if the cruise control is on). SPORT mode accelerator pedal is operated directly after – page 214. movement of the selector lever. If there is z Winter programme: Press button T no immediate acceleration or the foot – see next page. brake is not depressed, no gear is engaged and "R" flashes. After a few seconds, the display resumes showing "N". Start off by repeating the previously described procedure. 182 Easytronic

If the Winter programme is activated, SPORT mode is deactivated. If the vehicle is switched to manual mode while the winter programme is active, the winter programme is interrupted. The winter programme resumes upon return to automatic mode.

Winter programme T Kickdown In the event of difficulties starting off on Accelerator pedal pressed past the slippery roads, press button T ("A", pressure point: below certain speeds, the currently engaged gear and T appear in transmission shifts down into a lower gear. the transmission display). Easytronic Full engine power is available for switches to automatic mode and the acceleration. vehicle sets off in second gear. During kickdown no manual gear shifting is The winter program is switched off by: possible. z pressing button T again, z turning off the ignition. In order to protect the Easytronic the winter programme automatically switches itself off at extremely high clutch temperatures. Easytronic 183

When the engine speed approaches its "Rocking the car" upper limit, the transmission shifts to a If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle higher gear during kickdown even in to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, Manual mode. move the selector lever between R and A Without kickdown this automatic shift is (or + or -) in a repeat pattern while applying not effected in Manual mode. light pressure to the accelerator pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid sudden If SPORT mode is engaged, the drive acceleration. wheels may spin slightly when starting off with kickdown. This allows for maximum This applies only to the exceptional acceleration of the vehicle. circumstances mentioned above. Braking assistance from engine Automatic mode: When driving downhill, Easytronic does not Manoeuvring the vehicle shift into higher gears until a fairly high To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth engine speed has been reached. When during attempts to park or in garage braking, Easytronic shifts down in good entrances the creeping movement can be time. utilised by releasing the foot brake. Manual mode: Never actuate accelerator and brake To utilise the engine braking effect, select a pedals simultaneously. lower gear in good time when driving downhill. To prevent damage, Easytronic disengages the "creep function" when the temperature of the automatic clutch is high. 184 Easytronic

Stopping the vehicle Vehicle storage In Automatic or Manual mode, when the Before leaving the vehicle: vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter z engage hand brake mode engaged, second gear) is engaged z Remove the ignition key or, with the automatically and the clutch released. In R Open&Start system 3, remove the reverse remains engaged. electronic key from the vehicle. A warning buzzer sounds when the driver’s The most recently engaged gear (indicator door is opened if the engine is running, a in transmission display) remains engaged. gear is engaged and the foot brake is not With N, no gear is engaged. depressed. The vehicle creeps if the hand When the ignition is switched off the brake is not engaged. Move the selector Easytronic no longer responds to lever to N and apply the hand brake. movement of the selector lever. When stopping on gradients, engage the Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery hand brake or depress the brake pedal. To may become discharged if the vehicle is Fault prevent overheating of the clutch, do not parked for long periods. increase engine speed to ensure smooth Control indicator A illuminates in the idling when in gear. If the hand brake has not been applied, the event of a fault in the Easytronic system. In control indicator R flashes for a few the event of serious faults, F also appears To prevent damage to the Easytronic, the seconds after the ignition is switched off. in the transmission display. clutch is closed automatically at high clutch temperatures. With the engine off and the hand brake not It is possible to continue driving if only applied, when the driver’s door is opened a control indicator A illuminates. Manual Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy warning buzzer sounds and the control mode can then no longer be selected. period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level indicator R flashes; switch on ignition, crossings. If F appears in the transmission display, engage gear, switch off ignition and apply continued driving is not possible. hand brake. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Easytronic 185

If the interruption of power supply was not 3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see caused by a discharged battery, consult a figure) so that no dirt can get into the workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall opening when the cap is removed. Authorised Repairer. If the vehicle must be 4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by moved out of the flow of traffic, disengage lifting upwards – see figure. the clutch on vehicles with 5-speed Easytronic. Disengaging the clutch is not 5. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise using possible on vehicles with 6-speed a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3 Easytronic 3. The vehicle must be moved. – page 256) until clear resistance can be Raise the vehicle by the front axle when felt. The clutch has now been towing. disengaged. To disengage the clutch (only on vehicles Do not turn beyond the resistance, since with 5-speed Easytronic): this can damage the Easytronic. 1. Apply hand brake and switch off 6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap must be Interruption of power supply ignition. in full contact with the housing. The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle 2. Open bonnet and engage support. Towing the vehicle and starting the engine battery is discharged and a gear has been is not permitted when the clutch has been selected. The vehicle cannot move. released in this way, although the vehicle If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using can be moved a short distance. jump leads – page 248. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 186 Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission 3 allows Automatic automatic selection. transmission The engine can only be started when the gear selector is in position P or N . When starting in position N, depress the foot brake or apply the hand brake. After starting the engine, depress the brake before selecting a gear. Do not accelerate whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been selected and the brake is released, the vehicle will "creep". Never operate the accelerator and the brake pedal simultaneously. The selected gear is displayed in the transmission display. Transmission display 9 Warning Selector lever positions P, R, N and D 187 Display of mode or selected gear in left Gears 3, 2, 1 ...... 187 position of transmission display. The gear Disregard of these instructions may lead that has been selected by the transmission Electronically controlled driving to injuries or endanger life. programmes...... 188 appears in the right position of the Winter programme T ...... 189 transmission display. Only select 3, 2 or 1 to prevent automatic Kickdown...... 189 P Park position. upshifting or as an aid in engine braking. Engine braking...... 189 R Reverse gear. "Rocking the car"...... 189 Manoeuvring the vehicle...... 190 N Neutral. Stopping the vehicle...... 190 D Drive position. Fault...... 190 3, 2, 1 Selected gear 3. Interruption of power supply ...... 191 Automatic transmission 187

The selector lever can only be moved from Gears 3, 2, 1 P when the ignition is switched on and the 3, 2, 1 Transmission does not shift above foot brake depressed (selector lever lock). the selected gear. To engage P or R, push button on selector lever. Press button on selector lever to engage 3 or 1. The engine can only be started with lever in position P or N . When position N is The current gear is displayed in the selected, press foot brake or engage hand transmission display. brake before starting. Do not accelerate during the selection procedure.

Selector lever positions P, R, N and D P Park position. Front wheels locked. Only engage when the vehicle is stationary and the hand brake is applied. "P" appears on the transmission display. R Reverse gear. Only engage when the vehicle is stationary. "R" appears on the transmission display. N Neutral or idle. "N" appears on the transmission display. D Drive position for normal driving in 1st gear to highest gear. "D" and the current gear appear in the transmission display. 188 Automatic transmission

z Automatic neutral shift function z By means of delayed gear changing automatically sets the transmission to N (higher engine speeds) following a cold to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at start, the operating temperature traffic lights. programme quickly and automatically The automatic neutral is activated when: brings the catalytic converter to the temperature required for optimum – the selector lever is in automatic pollutant reduction. mode 3, z The adaptive programme automatically – the selector lever is in position 3, 2 or tailors gearshifting to the driving 1, conditions, e.g. greater load or – the foot brake is depressed, gradients. – the vehicle is stationary, – the accelerator pedal is not Electronically controlled driving actuated, programmes – the transmission fluid temperature is z When SPORT mode is engaged, the greater than 0 °C. transmission shifts at higher engine speeds (unless cruise control is on). As soon as the brake is released and the Control indicator 1 illuminates in the accelerator pedal is depressed, the transmission display. SPORT mode vehicle starts off in the usual manner. – page 214. z Winter programme: Press button T – page 189. Automatic transmission 189

Engine braking In order to utilise the engine braking effect when driving downhill, select drive range 3, 2 or, if necessary, 1 in good time. The braking action is most effective in drive range 1 . If drive range 1 is selected at too high a speed, the transmission remains in second gear until the shift point for first gear is reached, e.g. as a result of deceleration. "Rocking the car" If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, Winter programme T Kickdown move the selector lever from D to R in a Press button T if you are having problems Depressing the accelerator pedal past the repeat pattern while simultaneously starting off on a slippery road surface. pressure point: depending on the engine applying light pressure to the accelerator To activate speed the transmission shifts to a lower pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid The winter programme can be activated in gear. Full engine power is available for sudden acceleration. accelerating. P , R, N , D and 3 (T illuminates in the This applies only to the exceptional transmission display). The vehicle starts off circumstances mentioned above. in 3rd gear. To deactivate The winter program is switched off by: z pressing button T again, z shifting to 2 or 1 manually, z turning off the ignition. In order to prevent damage, the winter program switches off automatically at high transmission oil temperatures. 190 Automatic transmission

Stopping the vehicle The selector lever can be left in the chosen gear with the engine running. When stopping on gradients engage hand brake or depress brake pedal. To prevent overheating of the transmission, do not increase engine revolutions to ensure smooth idling while standing if a gear has been selected. Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level crossings. Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the Manoeuvring the vehicle hand brake. Then select P . Remove the Fault To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth ignition key or, with Open&Start system, If there is a problem with the automatic during attempts to park or in garage remove the electronic key 3 from the transmission, control indicator A entrances, the vehicle’s creeping vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the illuminates. The transmission no longer movement can be utilised by releasing the battery may become discharged if the shifts automatically. The vehicle can brake pedal. vehicle is parked up for long periods. continue to be driven. Never actuate accelerator and brake The ignition key can only be removed when Illumination of control indicator A may pedals simultaneously. the selector lever is in position P. also indicate a problem with the engine With the Open&Start system 3 , "P" fl ashes electronics – page 210. in the transmission display for 10 seconds For diesel engines 1) Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT and when the ignition is switched off if P has Z 19 DTH , illumination of control not been engaged or the hand brake has indicator A could also indicate that the not been applied. diesel fuel filter must be drained of water - page 300. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

1) Sales designation – see page 315. Automatic transmission 191

The transmission no longer shifts automatically. Vehicle can continue to be driven. Second gear is not available. Forward gears 1, 3 and 4 must be shifted manually using selector lever: 1 = 1st gear 2 =3rd gear 3, D =4th gear

Interruption of power supply 3. Push the yellow catch forward with a If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector screwdriver and move the selector lever lever cannot be moved out of position P. out of P. If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using 4. Mount selector lever trim on centre jump leads – see page 248. console and refit. If the battery is not the cause of the fault, Re-selecting P locks the selector lever release selector lever: again. Have cause of power supply interruption remedied. We recommend 1. Apply hand brake. that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised 2. Disengage selector lever trim rearward Repairer. from centre console and fold upwards. 192 Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect

This automatic transmission 3 allows both Automatic automatic gearchanges 9 Warning (automatic mode ) and manual transmission gearchanges (manual mode) 3. Disregard of these instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. with ActiveSelect The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N . When Selecting D puts the transmission in starting in position N, depress the foot automatic mode. brake or apply the hand brake. After the engine has started, depress the brake If the selector lever is moved to the left from before selecting a gear. Do not accelerate the D position, manual mode is activated. whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been Gearchanges can then be made manually selected and the brake is released, the by tipping the selector lever toward + or -. vehicle will "creep". Never operate the accelerator and the brake pedal simultaneously. The selected gear is displayed in the transmission display – page 193. Transmission display ...... 193 Selector lever settings P, R, N and D (automatic mode)...... 193 ActiveSelect (manual mode) ...... 194 Electronically controlled driving programmes...... 195 Winter programme T ...... 196 Kickdown...... 196 Engine braking...... 197 "Rocking the car"...... 197 Manoeuvring the vehicle...... 197 Stopping the vehicle...... 198 Fault...... 198 Interruption of power supply ...... 199 Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect 193

The selector lever can only be moved out of position P or N with the ignition switched on and the foot brake applied (selector lever lock). In selector lever position N the selector lever lock is activated after a delay and only if the vehicle is stationary.

Transmission display Selector lever settings P, R, N Display of mode or selected gear in left and D (automatic mode) position of transmission display. The gear P Park position. Front wheels locked. that has been selected by the transmission Only engage when the vehicle is appears in the right position of the stationary and the hand brake is transmission display. applied. "P" appears on the P Park position. transmission display. R Reverse gear. R Reverse gear. Only engage when the vehicle is stationary. "R" appears on N Neutral. the transmission display. D Automatic mode. N Neutral or idle. "N" appears on the M Manual mode with display of transmission display. selected gear. D Drive position for normal driving in 1st gear to highest gear. "D" and the current gear appear in the transmission display. 194 Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect

If the engine revs are too low the transmission automatically shifts to a lower gear, but not unless a certain speed has been reached. No automatic shifting to a higher gear takes place at high engine revs. For safety reasons, kickdown is also available in manual mode – page 196. The selected gear is displayed in the transmission display – page 193.

In position P or N , control indicator j ActiveSelect (manual mode) illuminates red in the selector lever Move selector lever out of position D and indicator strip if the selector lever is then forwards or backwards. blocked. + Shift to a higher gear To engage P or R, push button on selector lever. - Shift to a lower gear The engine can only be started with lever in If a higher gear is selected at a speed that position P or N . When position N is is too slow or a lower gear is selected at a selected, press foot brake or engage hand speed that is too high, the gear will not be brake before starting. changed. This prevents the revs from being too low or too high. Do not accelerate during the selection procedure. Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect 195

z Automatic neutral shift function z The operating temperature programme automatically sets the transmission to N automatically brings the catalytic to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at converter to the temperature that is traffic lights. required for optimum emission reduction The automatic neutral is activated when: after a cold start by selecting an appropriate gear (increased engine – the selector lever is in automatic or revs). manual mode, z The adaptive programme automatically – the foot brake is depressed, tailors gearshifting to the driving – the vehicle is stationary, conditions, e.g. greater load or gradients. – the accelerator pedal is not actuated, – the transmission fluid temperature is Electronically controlled driving greater than 0 °C. programmes As soon as the brake is released and the z When SPORT mode is engaged, the accelerator pedal is depressed, the transmission shifts at higher engine vehicle starts off in the usual manner. speeds (unless cruise control is on). Control indicator 1 illuminates in the transmission display. SPORT mode – page 214. z Winter programme: Press button T – page 196. 196 Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect

To deactivate The winter program is switched off by: z pressing button T again, z changing to manual mode, z turning off the ignition. In order to prevent damage, the winter program switches off automatically at high transmission oil temperatures.

Winter programme T Kickdown Press button T if you are having problems Depressing the accelerator pedal past the starting off on a slippery road surface. pressure point: depending on the engine To activate speed the transmission shifts to a lower The winter programme can be activated in gear. Full engine power is available for automatic mode (T illuminates in accelerating. transmission display). The vehicle starts off For safety reasons kickdown is available in in 4th gear. both automatic and manual mode. Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect 197

Engine braking "Rocking the car" The automatic transmission automatically If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle selects the driving programs with the best to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, possible braking effect. move the selector lever from D to R in a If necessary, lower gears can also be repeat pattern while simultaneously selected in manual mode to increase the applying light pressure to the accelerator braking effect. 1st gear has the greatest pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid braking effect. sudden acceleration. This applies only to the exceptional circumstances mentioned above.

Manoeuvring the vehicle To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth during attempts to park or in garage entrances, the vehicle’s creeping movement can be utilised by releasing the brake pedal. Never actuate accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. 198 Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect

Stopping the vehicle The ignition key can only be removed when The selector lever can be left in the chosen the selector lever is in position P. gear with the engine running. If the selector lever is not in position P when When stopping on gradients engage hand the ignition is switched off, control brake or depress brake pedal. To prevent indicator j and P flash in the selector lever overheating of the transmission, do not indicator strip – page 194, Fig. 17194 T. increase engine revolutions to ensure Move the selector lever to position P. smooth idling while standing if a gear has With the Open&Start system 3 , "P" fl ashes been selected. in the transmission display for 10 seconds Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy when the ignition is switched off if P has period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level not been engaged or the hand brake has crossings. not been applied. Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the hand brake. Then select P. Remove the Fault ignition key or, with Open&Start system, If there is a problem with the automatic remove the electronic key 3 from the transmission, control indicator A vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the illuminates. The transmission no longer battery may become discharged if the shifts automatically. The vehicle can vehicle is parked up for long periods. continue to be driven. Illumination of control indicator A may also indicate a problem with the engine electronics – page 210. For diesel engines 1) Z19DTL, Z19DT and Z 19 DTH , illumination of control indicator A could also indicate that the diesel fuel filter must be drained of water - page 300. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

1) Sales designation – see page 315. Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect 199

2nd gear and the highest gear can be selected in manual mode. Depending on the nature of the problem, only the highest gear may be available. Only the highest gear is available in D in automatic mode.

Interruption of power supply 3. To open, push the yellow catch down If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector with a screwdriver and move the selector lever cannot be moved out of position P or lever out of P or N. N. 4. Refit the ashtray insert 3 or rubber If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using covering on the bottom of the stowage jump leads – page 248. compartment 3 - page 108. If the battery is not the cause of the fault, Re-selecting P or N locks the selector lever release selector lever: again. Have cause of power supply interruption remedied. We recommend 1. Apply hand brake. your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 2. Remove the ashtray insert 3 or the rubber covering on the bottom of the stowage compartment 3 - page 108. 200 Driving hints Driving hints The first 600 miles / 1000 km Driving in mountainous terrain or Drive your vehicle at various speeds. Do with a trailer/caravan not use full throttle. Never allow the engine The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its to labour at low revs. cooling power is therefore independent of Make good use of all gears. Depress the the engine speed. accelerator pedal a maximum of around Since a considerable amount of heat is three quarters of the available pedal travel generated at high engine speeds and less in all gears. at slower speeds, do not shift down when Do not drive faster than three quarters of climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping maximum speed. with the gradient in the higher gear. Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the Driving with a roof load first 120 miles (200 km). Do not exceed the permissible roof load - pages 238, 324. For reasons of safety, Never coast with engine not distribute the load evenly and secure it running properly with retaining straps. Adjust the Many units will not function in this situation tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not (e.g. brake servo unit, electro-hydraulic drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). Check power steering). Driving in this manner is a and retighten the straps frequently. danger to yourself and others. Observe country-specific regulations. Roof loads are not permitted on the Astra Brake servo unit TwinTop. When the engine is not running, the brake servo unit is no longer effective once the Switching off the engine brake pedal has been depressed once or When you switch off, fans in the engine twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but compartment may continue running for a significantly greater force is required for time to cool the engine. braking. If the engine temperature is very high, e.g. Electro-hydraulic power assisted after driving in mountainous terrain: allow the engine to idle for approximately two steering minutes in order to prevent heat If the power-assisted steering fails when accumulation. being towed with the engine switched off, the vehicle can still be steered, but considerably more force is required. Driving hints 201

Vehicles with turbocharged engine Engine speed Clutch operation After running at high engine speeds or high Drive in a low engine speed range for each Always depress the clutch pedal hard to engine loads, operate the engine briefly at gear as much as possible. the floor to prevent shifting difficulties and a low load or run in neutral for approx. 30 transmission damage. seconds before switching off in order to Warming up protect the . When driving do not use the pedal as a Allow the engine to warm up while driving. foot rest; this will cause substantial clutch Do not warm it up by letting it run at idling wear. Save energy – more miles speed. Do not apply full throttle until the Please observe the running-in hints on the engine has reached operating Cooling fan previous page and the tips for saving temperature. energy on the following pages. The cooling fan is controlled via a After a cold start, the automatic thermoswitch and therefore only runs if Good, technically correct and economical transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in necessary. driving ensures maximum durability and automatic mode shifts into higher gears at performance for your vehicle. Vehicles with diesel particle filter 3 : the higher rpm. This allows the catalytic cooling fan comes on automatically during converter to quickly reach the temperature particle filter cleaning. Overrun required for optimum pollutant reduction. The fuel supply is automatically shut off Pedals during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is Correct gear selection Do not place any objects in the foot well being driven down long gradients or when Engine in neutral and without revving in the braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to which could slip under the pedals and lower gears. Stop-and-go traffic and inhibit the pedal travel. take effect, do not accelerate during driving at a speed too high for the selected overrun and, if in manual transmission gear or transmission ratio increases wear To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited, mode, do not de-clutch. To prevent and fuel consumption. there must be no mats in the area of the damage to the catalytic converter, overrun pedals. cut-off is temporarily deactivated when the Change down catalytic converter temperature is high. When decreasing speed, shift down into Battery care Vehicles with turbocharged engine the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch When driving slowly or when the vehicle is Flow-generated noises may be audible if with a high-revving engine. This is stationary, e.g. in slow urban traffic, stop- the accelerator is released quickly on especially important when hill climbing. and-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all account of air flow in the turbocharger. unnecessary electrical loads where possible (e.g. heated rear window, heated seats). Declutch when starting in order to relieve the strain on the starter and the battery. 202 Saving fuel, Protecting the environment

Saving fuel, End-of-life vehicle recovery Warming up z Full throttle and warming up at idle For detailed information on Vauxhall’s speed increase wear, fuel consumption, Protecting the on-going commitment to achieving an exhaust emission, the amount of environmentally sustainable future, pollutant in the exhaust and the amount environment including; design for recycling, take back of of noise. End-of-Life Vehicle (ELVs) and the recycling of ELVs, view z Drive off as soon as possible after www.vauxhall.co.uk/recycling for details. starting. Energy and environment- Uniform speed conscious driving z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel z High noise levels and exhaust emissions consumption, the exhaust emissions, the are often a result of driving without due proportion of pollutant in the exhaust attention to saving energy and gas and the noise level. protecting the environment. z Do not accelerate and brake Trend-setting technology z You should therefore drive with energy in unnecessarily. Drive at uniform speed, When developing and manufacturing your mind – "more miles with less fuel". watching the road. vehicle, Vauxhall used environment- friendly and in the main recyclable Reduce the noise level and exhaust Avoid frequent starting off and stopping materials. The production methods used to emissions by adopting an environment- e.g. at traffic lights, in short distance make your vehicle are likewise conscious driving style. This is extremely traffic and in queues of traffic by means environmentally-compatible. worthwhile and improves the quality of of clever planning. Select roads with life. good traffic flow. Recycling of production wastes keeps the circulation of material closed. Reduction of Fuel consumption depends to a great Idling extent on your own personal driving energy and water requirements also helps z The engine also consumes fuel when to conserve natural resources. style. The following hints are intended to help you consume fuel at a rate that is as idling. A highly advanced design means that your close as possible to the specified levels z If you have to wait for more than one vehicle can be easily disassembled at the – page 319. minute, it is worthwhile switching off the end of its working life, and the individual engine. Five minutes of idling materials separated for subsequent re-use. Check your vehicle’s fuel consumption every time you refuel. This facilitates corresponds to approximately 0.6 miles Materials such as asbestos and cadmium early detection of any irregularities (1 km) of driving. are not used. The refrigerant in the air causing increased fuel consumption. conditioning system 3 is CFC-free. New painting techniques employ water as a solvent. Saving fuel, Protecting the environment 203

Overrun z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal Repair and maintenance z The fuel supply is automatically shut off results in distinct fuel savings with no z Improper repairs or adjustment and during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is major loss of speed. maintenance work can increase fuel being driven down long gradients or Drive at no more than around three consumption. Do not carry out work on when braking – page 201. quarters of maximum speed and you will the engine yourself. z To enable the overrun cut-off to come use up to 50 % less fuel, without losing a You may out of ignorance infringe into action and save fuel, do not great deal of time. environmental laws by not disposing of accelerate or declutch during overrun. materials properly. Tyre pressure Appropriate parts might not be recycled. Correct gear selection z Inadequate tyre pressure, leading to z High revs increase engine wear and fuel higher road resistance, costs money in Contact with some of the materials consumption. two ways: for more fuel and increased involved may pose a health hazard. tyre wear. z z Do not race your engine. Avoid driving at We recommend that repair and high engine speeds. z Regular checks (every 14 days) pay off. maintenance be entrusted to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Making use of the tachometer helps to Electrical loads save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed z The power consumption of electrical Extreme driving conditions range for each gear as much as possible equipment increases fuel consumption. z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving with uniform engine speeds. Drive as on poor roads and winter driving all z Switch off all auxiliary electrical loads often as possible in top gear, select the increase fuel consumption. next higher gear as soon as possible, (e.g. air conditioning 3, heated rear and only change down when the engine window) when not needed. Fuel consumption increases dramatically is no longer running perfectly smoothly. in urban traffic and at winter Roof racks, ski-holders temperatures, especially on short trips High speed z Due to air resistance, a roof load can when the engine operating temperature z The higher the speed, the higher the increase fuel consumption by approx. is not reached. consumption and the noise level. At top 3.5 gal. /1000 miles (1 l/100 km). z Follow the hints given above to keep speed, you consume a great deal of fuel z Remove them if they are not being used. consumption to a minimum under such and produce excessive noise and conditions. exhaust emissions. 204 Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling

Fuel consumption, Fuel consumption Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5% Fuel consumption is determined under do not comply with DIN EN 228 and must specific driving conditions – page 319. not be used unless the vehicle has been fuel, refuelling specifically developed and approved for Special equipment increases the weight of these fuels. the vehicle. As a result, they can increase fuel consumption and reduce the specified Fuel with too low an octane number can maximum speed. cause pinking. Vauxhall cannot be held liable for resulting damage. For the first few thousand miles, friction between the engine and transmission Petrol with a higher octane number can components is higher. This increases fuel always be used. consumption. The ignition timing adjusts automatically Fuel for petrol engines to the grade of fuel used (octane number) – pages 314, 315. Normal commercial high-quality fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 5% in Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95 accordance with DIN EN 228 are suitable will ensure economical driving. (for catalytic converter – page 207, for For vehicles with Z20 LEH1) engine, use of Fuel for diesel engines...... 205 octane numbers – pages 314, 315). The 95 RON fuel reduces performance and Fuel filler cap...... 205 quality thereof has considerable effect on torque. Refuelling...... 205 the performance, running and service life of the engine. The additives mixed with the fuel are extremely important. For this reason you must only refuel with high quality fuels containing additives.

1) Sales designation – see page 314. Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling 205

Fuel for diesel engines Fuel filler cap Diesel engines must be operated only on If replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure to use commercially available diesel fuel meeting a genuine Vauxhall fuel filler cap for your the specifications of DIN EN 590. model to ensure full functionality. Since January 2004, some oil companies Diesel-engined vehicles have special fuel have mixed their diesel fuel with upto 5% filler caps. Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters) like RME (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in accordance with the current DIN EN 590 and does not harm the fuel/injection system. The characteristics of a diesel fuel mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not differ from conventional diesel fuel and do not influence the vehicle’s driveability. Important: Diesel fuel mixed with 5% FAME Refuelling according to DIN EN 590 must not be 9 Warning confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not to be used in Vauxhall engines. Care must be taken when handling fuel. The flow and filterability of diesel fuel are Before refuelling, switch off the engine temperature-dependent. and where applicable any auxiliary Diesel fuels with improved low temperature heating with combustion chambers (see properties are therefore available on the sticker on fuel filler cap). Switch off market during the winter months. Make mobile phones. sure that you fill the tank with winter fuel before the start of the cold weather 6 season. Additives can be used with diesel fuels with winter properties that are guaranteed by the manufacturer and when using diesel fuel filters that are heated depending on the outside temperature. 206 Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling

Correct filling depends to a large extent on 9 Warning proper operation of the fuel dispensing pump: Fuel is flammable and explosive. avoid naked flames or sparks when handling 1. Fully insert the pump nozzle and switch it fuel or just in its vicinity. Do not smoke. on. This also applies where fuel is perceptible 2. After automatic switch off, the specified only from its characteristic odour. If fuel tank capacity is reached after continued, odours occur in the vehicle itself, measured filling. Leave the filler nozzle in eliminate the cause immediately. We place until the stop. recommend your Vauxhall Authorised To close, position the fuel filler cap and Repairer. rotate past the resistance until the cap audibly clicks over the retainer. Close fuel tank cover. Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle. Wipe off any overflowing fuel immediately. The tank flap is locked together with the doors – page 76. Open the tank flap. Unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove and suspend from the tank flap. The fuel tank has a limiting system which prevents overfilling of the tank. Catalytic converter, exhaust gases 207

Damage to the catalytic converter or the Catalytic converter, vehicle may result if the following points exhaust gases are not observed: z Consult a workshop, such as your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quickly as possible in the event of misfiring, irregular engine running following a cold start, a significant loss of engine power or other unusual malfunctions which may indicate a fault in the ignition system. If necessary, driving may be continued for a short time at a low speed and with a low engine speed. Irregular engine running and a loss of Catalytic converter for petrol engine power when the Electronic engines Stability Program (ESP ®Plus 3) comes Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic into action are the result of operating Catalytic converter for petrol engines 207 converter and parts of the electronic conditions and are therefore of no Catalytic converter for diesel engines 208 system, rendering them inoperative. significance - page 212. Controlling exhaust emission...... 209 High quality fuels other than those listed on 6 Exhaust gases...... 210 pages 204, 314 (e. g. LRP1)) could damage Maintenance ...... 211 the catalytic converter.

1) LRP = L ead R eplacement P etrol. 208 Catalytic converter, exhaust gases z If unburned fuel enters the catalytic z If the emission control indicator Z Catalytic converter for diesel converter, this may result in overheating flashes, slow down until the flashing engines and irreparable damage to the catalytic stops and the control indicator is steady. Damage to the catalytic converter or the converter. Consult a workshop immediately. We vehicle may result if the following points recommend your Vauxhall Authorised You should therefore avoid are not observed: Repairer. For emission control indicator unnecessarily long use of the starter Z – page 209. z Consult a workshop, such as your when starting off, running the tank dry Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quickly (an irregular fuel supply will lead to as possible in the event of irregular overheating) and starting the engine by engine running, a significant loss of pushing or towing. engine power or other unusual malfunctions. If necessary, driving may be continued for a short time at a low speed and with a low engine speed. Irregular engine running and a loss of engine power when the Electronic Stability Program (ESP ®Plus 3) comes into action are the result of operating conditions and are therefore of no significance - page 212. Catalytic converter, exhaust gases 209

Flashing with the engine running indicates a fault that may damage the catalytic converter. You can continue to drive without causing damage by slowing down until the flashing stops and the control indicator is steady. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Controlling exhaust emission Control indicator Z for exhaust Some of the damaging substances in the Illuminates when the ignition is switched on exhaust such as carbon monoxide (CO), and during the start attempt. Goes off hydrocarbons (HC) and nitrous oxides shortly after the engine starts running. (NO x) are reduced to a minimum by If it illuminates while the engine running making structural changes – mainly in the there is a fault in the emission control injection system and the ignition system in system. The permitted emission values may conjunction with the catalytic converter. be exceeded. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 210 Catalytic converter, exhaust gases

If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it Exhaust gases is of no significance. Illumination of A could indicate the 9 Warning presence of water in the diesel fuel filter 3 . Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous A text message will appear in the service carbon monoxide, which is colourless and display at the same time, – page 44. Have odourless and could be fatal if inhaled. the fuel filter checked for moisture. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall If exhaust fumes penetrate the vehicle Authorised Repairer. interior, open the windows and consult a workshop immediately. We recommend If it flashes after the ignition is switched on, your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. there is a fault in the immobiliser system. The engine cannot be started – page 67. Avoid driving with an open luggage compartment. Otherwise, exhaust gases could penetrate the interior. Control indicator A for engine electronics During the first drive smoke may develop Illuminates for a few seconds after the because of wax and oil evaporating on the ignition is switched on. exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the If it illuminates when the engine is running, open for a while after the first drive and there is a fault in engine or transmission avoid inhaling the fumes. electronics. The electronic system switches to an emergency running programme. Fuel consumption may be increased and the driveability of the vehicle may be impaired. In some cases, the fault can be remedied by switching the engine off and on again. If the control indicator illuminates again when the engine is running, consult a workshop to have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Catalytic converter, exhaust gases 211

Diesel particle filter 3 Maintenance You are thereby making an important The diesel particle filter system contains a Have all maintenance work carried out at contribution towards keeping the air clean self-cleaning function at certain intervals. the intervals specified by Vauxhall. We and compliance with emissions legislation. The filter is cleaned by burning soot recommend that you entrust this work to Checking and adjustment of the particles. The amount of noise and fumes your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who fuel-injection and ignition systems is part of that is generated is normal. has proper equipment and trained the scope of inspection. For this reason you The heated rear window is automatically personnel available. Electronic testing should have all maintenance work carried switched on for the duration of the self- systems permit rapid diagnosis and out at the intervals specified in your Service cleaning 3. remedy of faults. This way you can be Booklet. certain that all components of the vehicle’s electrical, injection and ignition systems operate correctly, that your vehicle has a low level of pollutant emission and that the catalytic converter system will have a long service life. 212 Drive Control Systems

Drive Control Systems Interactive Driving System ESP ®Plus is ready for operation as soon as (IDS+) 3 the ignition is switched on and control indicator v goes out. IDS+ unites the sensors and control units of Plus the Electronic Stability Program (ESP ®Plus ), When ESP ® comes into action, v Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) and flashes. Continuous Damping Control (CDC). This The vehicle is now in a critical situation; ESP provides both excellent driving dynamics ®Plus allows you to keep control of the and greater safety. vehicle and reminds you to match your speed to the road conditions. Electronic Stability Program (ESP®Plus ) 3 9 Warning ESP ®Plus improves driving stability as necessary in any driving situation Do not let this special safety feature regardless of the type of road surface or tempt you into taking risks when driving. tyre grip. It also prevents the drive wheels Traffic safety can only be achieved by Interactive Driving System ...... 212 from spinning irrespective of road surface adopting a responsible driving style. Electronic Stability Program ...... 212 and tyre grip. Continuous Damping Control 3 ...... 214 The system monitors vehicle movements. 3 SPORT mode ...... 214 As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve Cruise control 3 ...... 216 (understeers/oversteers) engine output is Parking distance sensor 3 ...... 218 reduced (the sound of the engine changes) Automatic level control 3 ...... 220 and individual wheels are specifically Deflation Detection System ...... 221 braked. This considerably improves the Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 ... 222 driving stability of the vehicle on snow and ice and on wet or slippery road surfaces. Drive Control Systems 213

Illuminates while driving The system is switched off or a fault is present. Continued driving is possible. The driving stability can however deteriorate depending on road surface conditions. Reactivate ESP®Plus or have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self- diagnostics allow faults to be quickly remedied. Switching off 3 With SPORT mode 3 engaged (LED in Plus SPORT button illuminated ), the ESP® Plus Control indicator v can be disengaged for sports ESP® is reactivated by pressing the Illuminates for a few seconds when the performance. SPORT button again or switching on the ignition is switched on. The system is now Hold the SPORT button depressed for ignition. ready for operation. around 4 seconds. Control indicator v will SPORT mode – page 214. Flashing during driving illuminate. ESPoff will also appear in the This shows the system has come into service display – see page 44. action. The engine output may be reduced (the sound of the engine changes) and the 9 Warning vehicle may be braked automatically to a Plus small degree. ESP® should not be deactivated if one of the run-flat tyres 3 has no pressure. 214 Drive Control Systems

Continuous Damping Control 3 SPORT mode 3 (CDC) SPORT mode is used to change CDC adapts vehicle damping to the current damping 3, steering 3 , throttle driving situation and road conditions. application 3 and the shift point for automatic transmission 3 and The system continually monitors wheel and Easytronic 3 while driving. vehicle movements and immediately modifies the damping of each shock Damping and steering become more direct absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally and provide better contact with the road adapted to the driving situation and road surface. The engine reacts more quickly to conditions. accelerator movements. When SPORT mode is engaged, the For automatic transmission 3 and damping control is adapted to a sportier Easytronic 3, the shift times are reduced driving style ("harder" chassis setting). and gearchanges occur at a higher engine speed (except when cruise control is on). SPORT mode - see right column. Control indicator IDS+ for Continuous Damping Control Illuminates for approx. 10 seconds after the driver’s door is opened. If it illuminates while driving, there is a fault in the system. The system is not operational. For reasons of safety "harder" chassis calibration will be activated. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Drive Control Systems 215

To deactivate Briefly press the SPORT button again or switch off the ignition. The LED in the button goes out. Holding it pressed switches off ESP ®Plus – page 213. SPORT mode remains engaged. SPORT mode is deactivated if the Winter programme 3 is switched on (vehicles with automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3). Winter programme – pages 182, 189, 196.

To activate Control indicator IDS+ for SPORT mode Press the SPORT button. The LED in the Illuminates for approx. 10 seconds when button illuminates. the driver’s door is opened. If it illuminates In vehicles with automatic transmission 3 while driving, there is a fault in the system. or Easytronic 3, control indicator 1 also The system is not operational. Have the illuminates. cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall SPORT mode cannot be activated if the Authorised Repairer. The system’s Winter programme 3 is running (vehicles integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to with automatic transmission 3 or be quickly remedied. Easytronic 3). Winter programme – pages 182, 189, 196. 216 Drive Control Systems

Cruise control 3 With automatic transmission 3, only use Cruise control can store and maintain cruise control in D or in automatic mode speeds between 20 mph (30 km/h) and with Easytronic 3. 125 mph (200 km/h). Deviation from the When the cruise control is active, reaction stored speed may occur when driving up or times may be increased due to the different downhill. position of the feet. For safety reasons the cruise control cannot be activated until the foot brake 9 Warning has been operated once. The driver is always responsible for Cruise control is operated with buttons m, ensuring that vehicle speed is g , and § on the turn signal stalk. appropriate for the speed limit and Do not use the cruise control if it is not driving conditions - even if cruise control advisable to maintain a constant speed is engaged. Failure to follow the (e.g. in situations presenting a danger to instructions could lead to injuries or Control indicator m yourself and other road users, in heavy endanger life. When driving, control indicator m will traffic or on winding, slippery or greasy illuminates as soon as the system is roads). switched on. Drive Control Systems 217

Increase To deactivate With cruise control active, hold down Briefly press button §: Cruise control is button m or briefly press it repeatedly: switched off, control indicator m goes out speed is increased continuously or in steps and the vehicle slowly decelerates. To of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the continue driving, depress the accelerator accelerator pedal. pedal in the usual manner. When button m is released the current For reasons of safety, cruise control speed is stored and maintained. deactivates under certain driving Decelerate conditions. With cruise control active, hold down For example: button g or briefly press it repeatedly: z the vehicle’s speed drops below approx. speed is reduced continuously or in steps of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) or 1.2 mph (2 km/h). z the brake pedal is depressed or To activate When button g is released the current z the clutch pedal is depressed or Briefly press button m : the current speed is speed is stored and maintained. stored and maintained. The accelerator z Selector lever of automatic pedal can be released. transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in N. Vehicle speed can be increased by Resuming the stored speed depressing the accelerator pedal. When Briefly press button g at a speed above the accelerator pedal is released, the 20 mph (30 km/h): the speed selected previously stored speed is resumed. before the cruise control was switched off is resumed. The value of the stored speed is deleted when the ignition is turned off. 218 Drive Control Systems

If the vehicle approaches an obstacle when reversing, a series of signals can be heard in the vehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter as the distance is reduced. If the distance is less than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous. 9 Warning

Under certain circumstances, various reflective surfaces on objects or clothing as well as external noise sources may cause the system to fail to detect obstacles. For this reason, care must be taken when reversing even if the parking Parking distance sensor 3 To activate distance sensor is operational. This is of Parking distance sensor makes reverse The parking distance sensor system particular importance when in the vicinity parking easier by measuring the distance activates automatically when the ignition is of pedestrians. between the vehicle and an obstacle in the switched on and reverse gear is engaged. rear, and giving an acoustic signal in the Its operational readiness is indicated by To deactivate passenger compartment. illumination of the LED in button r. The system deactivates automatically The system records the distance using four when reverse gear is disengaged. sensors in the rear bumper. To deactivate the system when reverse gear is engaged, press button r. The LED in the button goes out. To reactivate, press button r again. Drive Control Systems 219

If it flashes Caravan/trailer towing equipment 3, The fault is due to sensors obstructed with caravan/trailer towing snow or ice. The sensors must be The system automatically detects if a undamaged and free of dirt, snow and ice. towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle. Interference due to external sources of When towing, the parking distance sensor ultra sound (e.g. pneumatic drills, rotary is automatically deactivated when the machines). Once the source of interference trailer cable is plugged into the socket. is removed, the system will operate Fitting rear load racks 3 normally. Rear load racks, e.g. bicycle racks, fitted near the sensors could disrupt the system. Observe the note on the Astra TwinTop on page 151.

Control indicator r Illuminated Fault in the system. The system is not ready for operation. Have the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. 220 Drive Control Systems

The vehicle is automatically raised at the rear, increasing the spring travel and ground clearance. The automatic level control system is activated after approx. 2 miles (3 km), depending on the vehicle loading and the nature of the road surface. Headlight range adjustment – page 138. In the event of malfunctions, do not utilise the vehicle’s full load capacity. Have the cause remedied without delay. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Automatic level control 3 Automatic level control makes it possible to keep the height of the vehicle constant when subjected to different loads in the rear (e.g. when towing a caravan or trailer). This significantly improves driving conditions. Drive Control Systems 221

Control indicator w If control indicator w illuminates red while driving, there is a loss of pressure. Stop immediately and check tyre pressures. A maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) is permitted for run-flat tyres 3. Observe the information on page 235. If control indicator w illuminates yellow, there is a fault in the system. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Deflation Detection System The control indicator flashes three times System initialisation (DDS = Deflation Detection when the system is initialising. After correcting tyre pressure or changing a tyre/wheel, the system must be initialised: System) 3 9 Warning With the ignition switched on, press the The deflation detection system DDS button for approx. 4 seconds. Control continuously monitors the speed of all The deflation detection system does not indicator w flashes 3 times. The system is wheels while driving. If a tyre loses replace manual checks with a suitable operational after driving a certain pressure, it grows smaller and rotates more gauge. distance. quickly than the other wheels. If the system detects a difference in speed, control Check tyre pressures at least every Only initialise the system if all tyres have indicator w illuminates red. 14 days and prior to any long journey; the the prescribed pressure. tyres should be checked when cold. Don’t Stop immediately and check tyre pressure. forget to check the spare 3. Mount the spare wheel if necessary – pages 254, 257. Tyre pressure – pages 232, 333. The system is operational when the ignition is switched on and can detect pressure loss from a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h). 222 Drive Control Systems

Tyre pressure monitoring Once the ignition is switched on, the system system 3 is operational and will continuously The tyre pressure monitoring system monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of Ü Board Computer continually checks the pressure and speed approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and above. of all four wheels while driving. 9 Warning BC 1 A pressure sensor is integrated in each BC 2 wheel. Once a minute, the pressure of each The tyre pressure monitoring system does Timer tyre is sent to a control unit, where it is not replace manual checks with a Tyres compared. If the system detects one or suitable gauge. more pressure differences, a message Check tyre pressures at least every 14 appears on the information display. days and prior to any long journey; the In vehicles with graphical information tyres should be checked when cold. Don’t display 3 or colour information display 3 forget to check the spare 3. and trip computer 3, current tyre pressures Display of current tyre pressure 3 can be shown in the information display. Tyre pressure – see pages 232, 333. Select menu item Tyresfrom the Board For the system to be operational, all wheels Computer menu. must be equipped with pressure sensors The current pressure of each tyre is and all tyres must be filled to the displayed. prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure monitoring system automatically detects if Warning messages the vehicle is being driven with a load of up A message is given on the information to 3 persons or a full load. display to warn of inconsistent tyre pressures. In some versions, the message is displayed in abbreviated form. For example, the following messages can be displayed: Drive Control Systems 223

Mount the spare wheel if necessary - pages 254, 257. A maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) is permitted for run-flat Navi active Navi active tyres 3. Observe the information on page 235. Tyre pressure Attention! On the colour information display this report will appear in red. check rear Front left tyre leftturn pressure loss Acknowledgement of warnings – page 54. (value in bar) (value in bar)

OK OK

A graphic 3 indicating the left rear tyre is A graphic 3 indicating the front left tyre is shown together with the current tyre shown together with the current tyre pressure: Slight pressure deviation. Reduce pressure: Significant pressure deviation or speed. Check pressure at next opportunity direct pressure loss! Steer out of flow of with appropriate gauge and correct if traffic as quickly as possible without necessary. endangering other drivers. Stop and check On the colour information display this the tyres. report will appear in yellow. 224 Drive Control Systems

General information The spare wheel/temporary spare is not equipped with a pressure sensor. The tyre pressure monitoring system is not operational if the spare wheel/temporary spare is in use. Control indicator w illuminates yellow –.– appears in the display of tyre pressures. Tyre pressure is monitored by the deflation detection system – page 221. If a complete set of wheels without tyre pressure control system sensors is mounted (e.g. four winter tyres), no error message will be displayed. The tyre pressure Control indicator w System initialisation monitoring system is not operational. The If control indicator w illuminates yellow The system must be initialised after a tyre pressure of a set of wheels without while driving, there is a fault in the tyre wheel/tyre change: sensors is monitored by the deflation pressure monitoring system. Fitting a wheel With the ignition switched on, press button detection system – page 221. without pressure sensor (e.g. spare wheel) DDS approx. 4 seconds. Control indicator w will also generate a fault in the system. flashes 3 times. The system is operational Have the cause of the fault remedied. We after driving a certain distance. recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Only initialise the system if all tyres have Authorised Repairer. The system’s the prescribed pressure (check when tyres integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to are cold). be quickly remedied. Drive Control Systems 225

Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring The tyre pressure monitoring system valve system can be retrofitted. We recommend cores and sealing rings must be replaced that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised each time the tyres are changed. We Repairer. recommend that you consult your Vauxhall When manually checking tyre pressure with Authorised Repairer. a pressure gauge, screw the adapter onto The use of commercially available liquid the valve. Tyre pressure – page 333. filled run-flat systems or repair kits can impair the function of the system. Vauxhall-approved systems can be used. Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones, walkie-talkies) operated in the area could cause interference in the tyre pressure monitoring system. 226 Brakes Brakes Brake system The brakes are an important factor for traffic safety. To improve effectiveness, do not brake unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles (200 km) after new brake pads have been fitted. Brake pad wear must not exceed a specified limit. Regular maintenance as detailed in the Service Booklet is therefore of the utmost importance for traffic safety. Have worn brake pads replaced. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will fit pads that Brake assist Brake system...... 226 have been tested and approved by If the brake pedal is operated with a Anti-lock brake system (ABS u)...... 228 Vauxhall and guarantee optimum braking powerful push, the vehicle is automatically power. braked at full braking power in order to Brake pads worn to their minimum achieve the shortest possible braking thickness generate a grinding noise. distance when full-on braking occurs Continued driving is possible. Have the (braking assistant). brake pads replaced as soon as possible Maintain steady pressure on the brake by a workshop. We recommend your pedal for as long as full-on braking is to Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. continue. When the brake pedal is released, the maximum brake force amplification is taken away. Adaptive brake light 3 During full-on braking, all three brake lights flash for the duration of ABS control. Brakes 227

Foot brake Check the brake lights before starting out The foot brake comprises two independent on a journey. On vehicles with check brake circuits. control 3 the brake lights are checked If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle can still be automatically – page 62. braked using the other brake circuit. If this Shortly after starting each journey the occurs, however, the brake pedal must be effectiveness of the brake system should depressed quite far using considerable be tested at low speed and without force before braking effect occurs. The inconveniencing other traffic, especially if distance required for braking will be the brakes are wet, e.g. after the vehicle greater. Consult a workshop before has been washed. continuing your journey. We recommend The brake fluid level should be checked your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. regularly. If the brake fluid level is too low To ensure the full pedal travel can be and the hand brake is not applied, control utilized, especially in case of a fault in one indicator R on the instrument panel of the brake circuits, there must be no mats illuminates – page 38. Hand brake in the vicinity of the pedals – page 201. Always apply hand brake firmly. On slopes Hill Start Assist 3 apply the hand brake as firmly as possible. When the engine is not running, the (HSA) support of the brake servo unit disappears The system helps pull away on inclines. The mechanical hand brake acts on the once the brake pedal has been depressed After releasing the footbrake, if the hand brakes on the rear wheels. It engages once or twice. Braking effect is not brake is not applied the brakes are only automatically when applied. reduced, but braking requires significantly released after 2 seconds. As soon as the To release the hand brake pull the lever up greater force. This is especially important acceleration is sufficient to prevent rolling slightly, press the ratchet knob, and fully to bear in mind when towing. back, the brake is released. lower the lever. To reduce the operating forces of the hand brake, depress the foot brake at the same time. 228 Brakes

Anti-lock brake system (ABS u) ABS continually monitors the brake system 9 Warning and prevents the wheels from locking For optimum braking, keep the brake regardless of the type of road surface or pedal fully depressed throughout the tyre grip. braking process, despite the fact that the It starts to regulate the braking pressure as pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock. pressure on the pedal. The vehicle remains steerable, even in the Do not let this special safety feature event of very heavy braking, for instance tempt you into taking risks when driving. on bends or when swerving to avoid an obstacle. Even in the case of full-on Traffic safety can only be achieved by braking, the ABS makes it possible to drive adopting a responsible driving style. round an obstacle without releasing the brakes. Brake system control indicator R The control indicator illuminates when the ABS control is made apparent though a ignition is switched on if the hand brake is pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is the regulation process. too low. Brake fluid - page 302. For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control indicator flashes for a few seconds when the ignition is turned off if the hand brake is not applied. 9 Warning

If the control indicator illuminates when the hand brake is not applied: Stop. Interrupt your journey immediately. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Brakes 229

Fault Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall 9 Warning Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may be quickly remedied. be subject to locking due to braking that is heavier than normal. The advantages of ABS are no longer operational. The vehicle can no longer be steered and may swerve.

You can continue driving, provided you drive with care and anticipation.

Control indicator u for ABS It comes on for a few seconds after the ignition is turned on. The system is ready for operation when the control indicator goes out. If the control indicator does not go out after a few seconds, or if it illuminates while driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The brake system remains operational without ABS regulation. Self-check Each time the ignition is turned on and the engine started, after moving away from a speed of around (2 mph) 3 km/h the system performs a self-check which may be audible. 230 Wheels, tyres

Wheels, tyres Tyres Vehicles with See page 333 for suitable tyres and tyre pressure monitoring system 3 restrictions. If winter tyres or tyres of a different size are fitted, tyre pressure monitoring system Tyres fitted in the factory are adapted to sensors can be retrofitted if so desired. the chassis and provide optimum driving Otherwise, the system will not indicate tyre comfort and safety. pressure deviations. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Changing tyre/wheel type Repairer. Before switching to different tyres or Deflation detection system 3 – page 221, wheels, seek advice on the technical tyre pressure monitoring system 3 possibilities. We recommend that you – page 222. consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will be able to advise you of any Vehicles with run-flat tyres 3 necessary modifications. When switching wheels, e.g. when switching to winter tyres, use run-flat tyres If tyres of a different size than those fitted Tyres ...... 230 as there is no spare wheel or tyre repair kit at the factory are used, the electronic in the vehicle. Changing tyre/wheel type...... 230 speedometer may require reprogramming Tyre pressure...... 232 to ensure that the correct speed is Run-flat tyres 3 - page 235. Tyre condition, wheel condition ...... 233 displayed. Run-flat tyres (RFT) 3...... 235 Winter tyres 3 ...... 236 9 Warning Wheel covers 3 ...... 236 Tyre chains...... 236 Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may lead to accidents and render the vehicle unroadworthy. Wheels, tyres 231

Fitting new tyres Run-flat tyres 3 must not be combined with Some brands of tyres have a beaded edge Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is even conventional tyres. for alloy wheels to protect against better. Ensure that tyres on one axle are damage. If wheel trim is used on steel z the same size 9 Warning wheels with beaded-edge tyres, the z the same design following specification must be followed: z We recommend that you have your tyres the same make z Use of wheel trims and tyres that z changed by your Vauxhall Authorised and have the same tread pattern. approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in Repairer, who will be familiar with the Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the question and thereby fulfil all requirements of the law as regards direction of travel. The rolling direction is requirements for the wheel and tyre disposal of tyres and can thus help to indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on combination. protect the environment and your health. the sidewall. z If the wheel trims and tyres used are not Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not (e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be have a beaded edge. refitted as soon as possible. This is the only way to obtain full benefit from the design 9 Warning properties of the tyre. Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims could lead to sudden loss of air and thereby accidents. 232 Wheels, tyres

Tyre pressure In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring After having checked the tyre pressure, Check tyre pressure, including the spare system 3 there is an adapter in the valve tighten the valve caps using the valve cap wheel, at least every 14 days and prior to cap key. Screw adapter to valve before key. any long journey; the tyres should be attaching tyre pressure gauge – page 222. Incorrect inflation pressures will impair checked when cold. Don’t forget to check Tyre pressure – page 333 and the adhesive safety, vehicle handling, comfort and fuel the spare 3. foil 3 on the inside of the tank flap. Have economy and will increase tyre wear. Use the valve cap key to make unscrewing adhesive foil replaced after changing to If the pressure is too low, this can result in the valve caps easier. The key is located on different tyre size. considerable tyre warm-up and internal the inside of the tank flap. Do not reduce tyre pressure when the tyres damage, leading to tread separation and are warm. Otherwise the pressure may even to tyre blow-out at high speeds. drop below the permissible minimum when the tyres cool down. Wheels, tyres 233

Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by Check tyres regularly for damage (foreign adjusting the inflation pressure. bodies, punctures, cuts, cracks, bulges in sidewalls). Check wheels for damage. In 9 Warning the event of damage or abnormal wear, consult a workshop. We recommend your Incorrect tyre pressure could lead to a flat Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. tyre. 9 Warning

Damage may lead to tyre blow-out.

Tyre condition, wheel condition Drive over edges slowly and at a right angle if possible. Driving over sharp edges can lead to hidden tyre damage and wheel damage which is only noticed later on. When parking, ensure that the tyres are not pressed against the edge of the kerb. 234 Wheels, tyres

General information z The danger of aquaplaning is greater if the tyres are worn. z Tyres age, even if they are used only very little or not at all. A spare wheel which has not been used for six years should be used only in emergencies; drive slowly when using such tyres. z Never fit used tyres the previous history and use of which you do not know. z So as not to impair brake cooling, use only wheel trims approved for use on your vehicle. Tread depth The legally permissible minimum tread Check tread depth regularly. depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when the tread has worn down as far as one of If wear in the front is greater than that in 1) the rear, move the rear wheels to the front the wear indicators (TWI ). A number of axle and vice versa. wear indicators are spaced at equal intervals around the tyre within the tread. Correct tyre pressure. For vehicles with Their position is indicated by markings on deflation detection system 3 or tyre the tyre sidewall. pressure control system 3, initialise the system – pages 221, 224. For reasons of safety, tyres should be replaced when their tread depth has worn down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).

1) TWI = T read W ear I ndicator. Wheels, tyres 235

Tyre designations Run-flat tyres Driving with a damaged tyre Meanings: (RFT) 3 A loss in tyre pressure is indicated by the 3 e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H Run-flat tyres have reinforced, self- tyre pressure monitoring system or the deflation detection system 3. 195 =Tyre width in mm supporting sidewalls, which ensure that the 65 = cross-section ratio tyres always have a certain amount of If a tyre has no pressure, continued driving (tyre height to tyre width) in % driveability, even when there is no pressure. is possible R = belt type: R adial Run-flat tyres are only permitted on z at a speed of max. 50 mph (80 km/h), RF = type: RunFlat vehicles with ESP ®Plus and tyre pressure z up to a distance of 50 miles (80 km). 15 = rim diameter in inch monitoring system or deflation detection 91 =load index system. 9 Warning z. B.: 91 corresponds to 618 kg H = speed code 9 Warning When driving with a flat tyre, do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or a Speed code letters: Even the tyre pressure of run-flat tyres distance of 50 miles (80 km). Q Up to 100 mph (160 km/h) must be checked regularly. The vehicle will be more difficult to steer S Up to 112 mph (180 km/h) Check tyre pressures at least every 14 and handle and the braking distance will T Up to 118 mph (190 km/h) days and prior to any long journey; the be longer. H Up to 130 mph (210 km/h) tyres should be checked when cold. V Up to 150 mph (240 km/h) Adapt driving style and speed to the W Up to 168 mph (270 km/h) conditions at hand. Depending on tyre manufacturer, run-flat tyres can be identified from a marking on Do not use a tyre repair kit. the tyre wall. E.g. ROF = RunonFlat for Goodyear or SSR = Self Supporting Runflat Deflation detection system 3 – page 221, Tyre for Continental. tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – page 222. Run-flat tyres may only be used in combination with Vauxhall-approved alloy wheels; this also applies to winter tyres. 236 Wheels, tyres

Winter tyres 3 Wheel covers 3 For notes on fitting new tyres – page 230. If the wheel trims and tyres used are not Limitations - pages 235, 333. Vauxhall-approved, make sure that the tyres do not have a beaded edge – see Winter tyres improve safety at page 231. temperatures below 7 °C and should therefore be fitted on all the wheels. The design of summer tyres means they have limited qualities for winter driving. If the maximum permissible speed for the winter tyres is less than that of the vehicle, a notice indicating the maximum permissible speed for the tyres must be affixed within the driver’s field of vision1). Tyre chains If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted Limitations and further information with a summer tyre, the vehicle’s – page 333. driveability may be affected, especially on slippery road surfaces. Obtain a Tyre chains are only permitted on the drive replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as wheels (front axle). They must be fitted to possible, and have the wheel balanced the tyres symmetrically in order to achieve and fitted to the vehicle. a concentric fit. Always use fine mesh chains that add no more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the inboard sides (including chain lock). We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

1) Varies from country to country on account of national regulations. Wheels, tyres 237

Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into Temporary spare wheel contact with parts of the chain and be Tyre chains must not be used on the damaged. Remove the wheel trim – see temporary spare wheel. If you need to use page 257. tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre, Tyre chains may only be used at speeds up fit the temporary spare on the rear axle to 50 km/h and, when travelling on roads and transfer one of the rear wheels to the that are free of snow, they may be used for front axle. brief periods only since they are subject to For notes on the temporary spare wheel – rapid wear on a hard road and may snap. see page 255. Wheel changing – see page 257. Correct tyre pressure. Deflation detection system 3 – see page 221, tyre pressure control system 3 – see page 222. 238 Roof racks, Caravan and trailer towing

Roof racks, 9 Warning

Caravan and trailer Disregard of these notes can lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle towing passengers should be informed accordingly.

Roof racks 3 For reasons of safety and to avoid damaging the roof, we recommend that you use the Vauxhall roof rack system approved for your vehicle. Consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Roof loads are not permitted on the Astra Version without roof railing TwinTop. Lift the covers from the fitting openings. Fasten the roof rack following the Attach roof rack at appropriate points, see 3 Roof racks ...... 238 instructions that accompany the system. enclosed roof luggage rack system Towing equipment 3...... 239 instructions. Driving hints – see page 200. Towing equipment with detachable coupling ball bar 3 ...... 239 Stowage of coupling ball bar ...... 242 Caravan and trailer loads...... 243 Coupling socket load...... 244 Rear axle load during towing...... 244 Tyre pressure...... 244 Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA)...... 244 Driving characteristics, towing tips .... 245 Starting on inclines ...... 246 Roof racks, Caravan and trailer towing 239

Towing equipment 3 Use only towing equipment that has been approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting the retrofitting of towing equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will advise you on any possible towed load increases. Your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer has instructions on how to install the towing equipment and make any necessary changes to the vehicle that affect the cooling system, heat shields or other equipment. Observe the note on the Astra TwinTop on Version with roof railing 3 page 151. Towing equipment with Attach roof rack to roof railing at points Do not mount towing equipment to detachable shown in figure, see enclosed roof luggage 1) coupling ball bar 3 rack system instructions. vehicles with Z 20 LEH engine. Stowage of coupling ball bar 9 Warning In Saloons, the coupling ball bar is in a pouch, fastened in the luggage The coupling ball bar is to be removed compartment cargo box with a strap when not towing. - page 242. In Estates, the coupling ball bar is fastened For installation dimensions of the trailer with a strap in a compartment in the spare towing equipment – pages 345, 346. wheel well of the luggage compartment.

6

1) Sales designation – see page 314. 240 Roof racks, Caravan and trailer towing

Fitting the coupling ball bar Checking the tensioning of the coupling Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be Disengage and fold down the socket. ball bar tensioned before it is inserted into the Remove the sealing plug from the hole for z Red marking on turn knob points coupling housing: the coupling ball bar and stow it in the towards white marking on coupling ball z Unlock coupling ball bar (key to position luggage compartment. bar. 1) – see Fig. 17222 T. z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between z Pull turn knob out and then turn it rotary knob and coupling ball bar. clockwise as far as it will go – see Fig. z Key is in lock at position 1. 17223 T. Roof racks, Caravan and trailer towing 241

Important Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly installed: z Green marking on turn knob points towards white marking on coupling ball bar. z No gap between turn knob and coupling ball bar. z Coupling ball bar must be seated firmly in coupling housing. z Coupling ball bar must be locked and key must be removed.

Inserting the coupling ball bar Lock coupling ball bar (key to position 2 9 Warning Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar into – page 240, Fig. 17222 T). Remove key and the coupling housing and push firmly press protective flap into position. Towing a caravan/trailer is only upwards until the coupling ball bar audibly When the coupling ball bar is locked the permitted with a properly attached engages in position. turn knob can no longer be pulled out. coupling ball bar. If the coupling ball bar The turn knob snaps back into its home cannot be properly attached, consult a position resting against the coupling ball workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall bar. Authorised Repairer.

9 Warning Eye for break-away stopping cable In the case of caravans/trailers with brake, Do not touch the turn knob when attach the break-away stopping cable to inserting the coupling ball bar - risk of the eye (arrow in Fig. 17225 T). injury. 242 Roof racks, Caravan and trailer towing

Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the coupling ball bar. Fold away the socket – page 240, Fig. 17221 T. Do not use steam-jet cleaners or other high-pressure cleaners to clean the coupling ball bar.

Dismounting the coupling ball bar Stowage of coupling ball bar Unlock coupling ball bar (key to position 1 Hatch – page 240, Fig. 17222 T). Stow the coupling ball bar in the pouch and Pull out turn knob and then turn it clockwise fasten it in the luggage compartment as far as it will go. Pull coupling ball bar cargo box with the strap. down out of the coupling housing and stow Estate in compartment in the luggage Stow the coupling ball bar in the compartment – page 239. compartment in the spare wheel well of the luggage compartment, fastening it with the strap. Roof racks, Caravan and trailer towing 243

Caravan and trailer loads1) The permissible caravan/trailer load should The actual caravan/trailer load plus the The permissible caravan/trailer loads are be fully utilised only by drivers who are actual gross weight of the towing vehicle vehicle- and engine-dependent maximum adequately experienced in towing large or must not exceed the maximum permitted values which must not be exceeded. The heavy caravans/trailers. towing weight. For example, if the actual caravan/trailer load is the difference The permitted caravan/trailer load applies permitted gross vehicle weight is utilised, between the actual gross weight of the up to the specified incline and up to an the trailer/caravan load must only be used caravan/trailer and the actual coupling altitude of 1000 metres above sea level. until the maximum permitted towing socket load with the caravan/trailer Since engine power decreases as altitude weight is reached. The maximum coupled. When the caravan/trailer load is increases because of the air becoming permitted towing weight is shown on the being checked, therefore, only the thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability, identification plate – page 312. caravan/trailer wheels – and not the jockey the permitted towing weight also wheel – must be standing on the weighing decreases by 10 % for every 1000 metres of apparatus. additional altitude. The towing weight The permissible caravan/trailer loads for does not have to be reduced when driving your vehicle are given in the vehicle on roads with slight inclines (less than 8 %, documents. Unless otherwise stated, they e. g. motorways). are valid for gradients up to max. 12 %.

1) Observe national regulations. 244 Roof racks, Caravan and trailer towing

Coupling socket load Rear axle load during towing The coupling socket load is the load With a trailer coupled and the towing exerted by the caravan/trailer on the vehicle fully loaded (including all coupling ball. It can be varied by changing occupants), the permissible rear axle load the weight distribution when loading the (see identification plate or vehicle caravan/trailer. documents) may be exceeded by 65 kg The maximum permissible coupling socket and the permissible gross vehicle weight by load (75 kg) is specified on the towing 45 kg for the Hatch. For the Estate, the equipment identification plate and in the permissible rear axle load may be vehicle documents. Always aim for the exceeded by 60 kg and the permissible maximum load, especially in the case of gross vehicle weight by 30 kg. If the heavy caravans/trailers. The coupling permissible rear axle load is exceeded a socket load should never fall below 25 kg. maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) applies 50 mph (80 km/h) if approved for When measuring the coupling socket load, use as a commercial vehicle). If national Tyre pressure make sure that the drawbar of the loaded regulations specify a lower maximum caravan/trailer is at the same height as it speed for vehicles towing a trailer, this Increase the tyre pressure on the towing will be when the caravan/trailer is coupled must be observed. vehicle to the value specified for a full load with the towing vehicle loaded. Particularly – page 333. Check the pressure of the important for caravans/trailers with spare wheel and caravan/trailer wheels. tandem axle. Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA) TSA monitors vehicle movements when towing a caravan or trailer. If the system detects lurching movements, engine power is reduced and the vehicle/trailer combination is selectively braked until the lurching ceases. Roof racks, Caravan and trailer towing 245

Parking distance sensor 3 is deactivated If the trailer/caravan starts to sway, drive when towing. more slowly, do not attempt to correct the Handling is greatly influenced by the steering and brake sharply if necessary. loading of the trailer/caravan. Loads If it is necessary to apply the brakes fully, should therefore be secured so that they depress the brake pedal as hard as cannot slip and be placed in the centre of possible. the trailer/caravan if possible, i.e. above Remember that the braking distance for the axle. vehicles towing caravans/trailers with and In the case of trailers with low driving without brake is always greater than that stability or caravans with a permitted gross for vehicles not towing a caravan/trailer. vehicle weight of over 1300 kg (Hatch) / 1200 kg (Estate), do not exceed a speed of 6 50 mph (80 km/h); the use of a friction-type stabiliser is highly recommended. Driving characteristics, towing Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) tips if possible, even in countries where higher In the case of caravans/trailers with brakes, speeds are permitted. attach breakaway stopping cable to eye. Make sure that you have enough room Before attaching the trailer/caravan, when cornering and avoid sudden lubricate the ball of the trailer/caravan manoeuvres. towing device. However, do not lubricate the ball if a stabiliser, which acts on the coupling ball, is being used to damp hunting. Check caravan/trailer lighting before starting to drive. The fog tail lights on the vehicle are deactivated when towing a caravan or trailer. Trailers with LED turn signals must have a provision enables light monitoring for commercial bulbs. Turn signal control indicator - page 40. 246 Roof racks, Caravan and trailer towing

When driving downhill, the brakes are Before starting off under extreme under considerably more load when towing conditions (high combination weight, a caravan/trailer. For this reason, drive in mountainous terrain with steep inclines), the same gear as if driving uphill and drive switch off all unnecessary electrical loads at a similar speed. (e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning 3 3 Automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 system , heated front seats ). in automatic mode will automatically select the driving programme with the optimum engine braking effect. Gear position 3, 2 or 1 can also be manually selected if required. The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling power is therefore independent of the engine speed. Starting on inclines Since a considerable amount of heat is For vehicles with manual transmission, the generated at high engine speeds and less most favourable engine speed when at slower speeds, do not shift down when starting off on an incline is between 2500 climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping and 3000 rpm for petrol engines and with the gradient in the higher gear. between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel engines. Hold engine speed constant, engage clutch gradually (let slip), release hand brake and open throttle. If possible, the engine speed should not drop during this procedure. For vehicles with automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in automatic mode, apply full throttle. Self-help 247 Self-help Starting 9 Warning Do not start with quick charger This prevents damage to electronic Disregard of these notes can lead to components. Starting the engine with jump leads 3 248 injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle Towing the vehicle...... 249 passengers should be informed Do not start by Towing service ...... 250 accordingly. pushing or towing Towing another vehicle...... 251 Because your vehicle is fitted with a Warning triangle ¨3...... 252 Diesel fuel system, bleeding catalytic converter, it must not be started First-aid kit (cushion) + 3...... 252 Never let the tank run dry! If control by pushing or towing – page 207. Y Spare wheel placed in luggage indicator illuminates, refuel as soon as Vehicle with the Open&Start system 3 must compartment...... 254 possible. Refuel immediately if it flashes. not be started by pushing or towing if the Jack £3 and vehicle tools 3 ...... 256 It is possible to restart the engine if the tank battery is discharged, since the steering Changing wheels ...... 257 has been run dry. A delayed start is to be column lock cannot be released. Tyre repair kit 3...... 261 expected. Switch on the ignition three times The vehicle can only be started using jump for approx. 15 seconds. Then attempt to Electrical system ...... 264 1) leads – see following page. Fuses and the most important circuits start the engine for approx. 40 seconds . If they protect ...... 266 the engine does not start, wait at least 5 minutes and try again. If the engine Bulb replacement ...... 274 does not start, consult a workshop. We Halogen headlight system...... 274 recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Xenon headlight system 3, Adaptive Repairer. Forward Lighting system 3 ...... 278 Front indicator lights ...... 281 Fog lights 3...... 281 Tail lights...... 282 Number plate light ...... 291 Courtesy lights ...... 292

1) For engine Z 17 DTH: For technical reasons, only possible for 30 seconds. Sales designation - see page 315. 248 Self-help

Starting the engine with jump z Use auxiliary battery with same voltage leads 3 (12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) must not be A vehicle with a discharged battery can be considerably less than that of the started using jump leads and the battery of discharged battery. Voltage and another vehicle. capacity information can be found on the batteries. 9 Warning z Use jump leads with insulated terminals and a cross section of at least 16 mm 2 Be extremely careful when starting with (25 mm 2 for diesel engines). jump leads. Any deviation from the z Do not disconnect the discharged following instructions can lead to injuries battery from the vehicle. or damage caused by battery explosion or damage to the electrical systems of z Switch off all unnecessary electrical both vehicles. consumers. z Never expose the battery to naked z Do not lean over the battery during jump flames or sparks. starting. z A discharged batter can freeze at z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to temperatures of 0 °C. Defrost the frozen touch those of the other lead. battery in a warm room before z Do not touch the vehicles while jump connecting jump leads. starting. z Do not allow battery fluid to come into z Apply hand brake. Manual transmission contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or or Easytronic 3 in neutral, automatic painted surfaces. The fluid contains transmission 3 in P. sulphuric acid which can cause injuries and damage in the event of direct contact. z Wear eye protection and protective clothing when handling a battery. Self-help 249

z Do not connect leads to negative terminal of discharged battery! z The connection point should be as far away from the discharged battery as possible. z Route the leads so that they cannot catch on rotating parts in the engine compartment. z Start the engine of the vehicle providing the jump start. z After 5 minutes, start the other engine. Start attempts should be made at intervals of 1 minute not last longer than Connect the leads in the order shown in the 15 seconds. Towing the vehicle illustration: z After starting, allow both engines to idle To open the cover concealing the towing 1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to for approx. 3 minutes with the leads eye socket at the front right of the vehicle: the positive terminal 1 of the battery connected. disengage the cover at the bottom and pull providing the jump start (identified by it off downwards. z In order to avoid excess voltage in the "+" sign on battery case or terminal). electrical system, before removing a For versions with tyre repair set 3, the 2. Connect the other end of this lead to the lead, switch on an electrical consumer towing eye is in the stowage compartment positive terminal 2 of the discharged (e.g. light, heated rear window) in the in the boot below the loading floor cover battery ("+" sign). vehicle receiving the jump start. – page 261. 3. Connect the first end of the other jump z Reverse above sequence exactly when For versions with spare wheel 3, the towing lead to the negative terminal 3 of the removing leads. eye is in the stowage compartment for the battery providing the start ("–" sign). jack 3 and tool kit 3 below the spare wheel – page 256. 4. Connect the other end of the second jump lead 4 to ground on the other 6 vehicle, e.g. engine block or screw connection in the engine suspension. 250 Self-help

Vehicles with the Open&Start system 3 Vehicles with automatic transmission 3 must not be towed when the battery is should be towed facing forward only and discharged because the steering column must not be towed faster than 50 mph (80 lock cannot be released. Towing is only km/h) or further than 60 miles (100 km). If possible with the ignition switched on. Use the transmission is defective, or if the jump leads to start the engine if necessary. above speed or distance is to be exceeded, Manual transmission or Easytronic 3 in the front axle must be raised off the neutral, automatic transmission 3 in N. ground. Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive Consult a workshop. We recommend your tractive force can damage the vehicle. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will serve you best to get your vehicle back on 9 Warning the road. If the automatic clutch has been manually For braking and steering, significantly released in vehicles with Easytronic 3 Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far higher forces are required: brake because of an interruption to the power as it will go until it stops in a horizontal assistance and steering assistance are supply, towing is not permitted position. effective only with the engine running. – see page 185. In this case, consult a Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a workshop as soon as possible. We tow rod 3 – to the eye. To prevent the entry of exhaust fumes from recommend your Vauxhall Authorised the towing vehicle, switch on the air Repairer. The towing eye must only be used for recirculation 3 and close the windows. towing and not recovering a vehicle. After towing, unscrew the towing eye clockwise and refit the cover. Switch on ignition to release steering column lock and to permit operation of Towing service brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper. Entrust your vehicle only to the towing service of your choice and obtain an estimate on towing costs before employing any towing service. In this way you avoid unnecessary costs and possible insurance problems during claim processing. Self-help 251

Towing On some versions 3: remove the cover Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far another vehicle concealing the towing eye at the rear right as it will go until it stops in a horizontal To open the cover concealing the towing of the vehicle by disengaging the tabs at position. eye socket at the rear right of the vehicle: the bottom and pulling off the cover from Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a disengage the cover at the bottom and pull the top. tow rod 3 – to the eye. 3 it off downwards. For versions with tyre repair set , the The towing eye must only be used for towing eye is in the stowage compartment towing and not recovering a vehicle. in the boot below the loading floor cover – page 261. Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive tractive force can damage the vehicle. For versions with spare wheel 3, the towing eye is in the stowage compartment for the After towing, unscrew the towing eye jack 3 and tool kit 3 below the spare clockwise and refit the cover. wheel – page 256. Version with cover 3: install by inserting the bottom lugs of the cover 3 in the bumper, folding and then press the lugs at the top into place. 252 Self-help

Warning triangle ¨3 Estate, Van First-aid kit (cushion) + 3 Hatch, Astra TwinTop Insert the warning triangle in the retaining Hatch Store warning triangle in rear luggage straps of the tailgate inner panelling. Secure the first-aid kit to the right luggage compartment wall: first fit warning triangle compartment wall using the retaining into recess on left and the insert in guide on strap. right. To remove the warning triangle, lift to the right and pull out to the right. For vehicles with cargo box 3: Lift the warning triangle with the right half of the cargo box. Pull out the warning triangle to the right. Self-help 253

Estate Van Astra TwinTop Fasten the first-aid kit (cushion) to the left Place first aid kit in stowage compartment Store the first-aid kit (cushion) in the recess luggage compartment wall with a behind driver’s seat. To open the cover, behind the strap in the left luggage retaining strap. press the locking tab. compartment wall. 254 Self-help

Spare wheel 3 Stowing wheels with wide tyres in the Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre spare wheel well repair kit instead of a spare wheel The spare wheel well is not designed for all permitted tyre sizes. If a wheel wider than – page 261. the spare must be stowed in the spare wheel well after changing wheels, the floor cover can be placed on the projecting wheel. This must be observed when loading the luggage compartment, especially for the Astra TwinTop.

Spare wheel placed in luggage compartment The spare wheel is located in the luggage compartment below the floor cover and is fastened with a nut. On Estates, there is also a spacer over the retaining nut. Self-help 255

General information Notes on temporary spare wheel 3 Depending on version, the spare wheel z Using a temporary spare wheel may may be in the form of a temporary spare change the driving behaviour of the wheel 3. Refer to the notes on this page vehicle, particularly if using winter and pages 237, 260, 333. tyres 3. Replace defective tyre as quickly On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare as possible, balance wheel and fit to wheel may have a steel rim. vehicle. z If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel Fit only one temporary spare wheel. may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you z Do not drive faster than 50 mph use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling (80 km/h). may be altered. Obtain a replacement for z Take curves slowly. the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the wheel balanced and fitted to the z Do not use the temporary spare wheel vehicle. for a lengthy period. Estate z Replace temporary spare wheel with full Take adapter 3 and hooks 3 from the The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre 3 and a smaller rim than the wheels mounted specification wheel without delay. rails in the luggage compartment walls. 1) Raise the rear lashing eyes and lift the floor on the vehicle : Using the spare wheel z Tyre chains are not permitted on the cover to the vertical position so that it rests may alter vehicle handling. Have the temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains are on the roof lining. defective tyre replaced as soon as possible, necessary after a front wheel puncture, balance the wheel and have it mounted on fit the temporary spare wheel to the rear When closing, guide the lashing eyes the vehicle. and a rear wheel to the front. Check tyre through the slots in the floor cover. pressure and adjust if necessary Vehicles with cargo box 3: Removal – page 334. – page 103. z Follow temporary spare wheel Astra TwinTop instructions on pages 237, 260, 333. Accessing the spare wheel when the roof is open: Engage luggage compartment cover on the rear window frame and activate the loading aid (see page 104). Raise the floor cover in the luggage compartment.

1) Country-specific version: The spare wheel is only to be used as a temporary spare wheel. 256 Self-help

Notes on directional tyres 3 Directional tyres only provide maximum performance when they are mounted in the correct direction of rotation. If the tyres or spare wheel must be mounted opposing the specified direction of rotation (e.g. after changing a flat tyre), observe the following: z Vehicle handling may change. Have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible, and have the wheel balanced and mounted on the vehicle. z Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). Jack £3 and After use, stow away the jack and tools in z Be especially careful when driving in rain 3 the compartment as shown in illustration. and snow. vehicle tools The jack and the vehicle tools have been Astra TwinTop: The tools for emergency Further information on directional tyres specially developed for your vehicle and operation of the convertible hardtop are – page 230. must only be used on that vehicle. Only use stowed in the glove compartment. jack for changing wheels. Vehicles with spare wheel 3 The jack and tool kit are in a stowage compartment in the boot below the spare wheel. Remove spare wheel, – page 254. Vehicles with tyre repair set 3 The tool kit and tyre repair set are in a storage compartment below the floor cover in the luggage compartment. Self-help 257

Changing wheels z Never change more than one wheel at z No people or animals may be in the There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a once. vehicle when it is jacked up. spare wheel – page 261. z Block the wheel diagonally opposite the z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle. To ensure your safety, make the following wheel to be changed by placing wedge z Do not start or run the engine while the preparations and observe the following blocks or equivalent in front and behind vehicle is on the jack. information when changing wheels: the wheel. z Apply a light coating of grease to the z 3 z Park the vehicle on a level, firm and non- Use the jack only to change wheels. cone of each wheel bolt before screwing skid surface. z If the ground on which the vehicle is in the wheel bolts after a wheel change. z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm Some normal commercial grease will be hand brake, automatic transmission 3 - thick) should be placed under the required for this purpose. We selector lever in P, manual transmission jack 3 . Using a thicker board could recommend your Vauxhall Authorised or Easytronic 3 damage the jack 3 and the vehicle. Repairer. - engage 1st or reverse gear. z Correctly set up the warning triangle 3. Warning triangle – page 252. z Remove spare wheel from luggage compartment, see previous page 254. z Before raising the vehicle, set the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. z On the Astra TwinTop, the roof must be closed before the vehicle is raised. 258 Self-help

1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook Alloy wheels 3 : Disengage the wheel 2. Turn wheel bolts half a turn using the included with the vehicle tools 3. For bolt caps with a screwdriver and remove. wheel bolt wrench 3, pushing the vehicle tools, – page 256. Protect the wheel by inserting a soft cloth wrench 3 on as far as possible. On wheel trims with visible wheel bolts 3: between the screwdriver and ally wheel. The trim can remain on the wheel. Do not remove the retaining washers 3 on the wheel bolts. Self-help 259

3. The location of each jacking point 3 is 4. Before positioning the jack 3 , set it to Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and indicated by a mark on the bottom edge the necessary height by rotating the eye turn crank to raise vehicle. 3 of the vehicle. by hand. Position the jack at the front If this is not the case, carefully lower the For vehicles with side skirt trims 3 , the or rear so that the jack claw spans the vehicle immediately and reposition the jack 3 may not be used as it may vertical base and grips in the recess in jack. damage the vehicle. the vertical base. Make sure it is properly positioned. 5. Unscrew wheel bolts and wipe clean with a cloth. Then apply a light coating of The jack base must be on the ground grease to the wheel bolts. Do not grease directly below the jacking point in a the thread of the bolts. Do not put the manner that prevents it from slipping. wheel bolts down in a location where they may become soiled. If the wheel bolts have retaining washers 3, they must not be removed. 260 Self-help

10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clean the 13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel wheel around the retaining clips. Valve bolts on the new wheel checked on the symbol 3 on back of wheel trim must vehicle using a torque wrench as soon point towards valve on wheel. as possible and, if necessary, corrected. Align and refit wheel trim or wheel bolt Tightening torque – page 333. caps 3. 14. Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel Alloy wheels 3 : Align and refit wheel that was removed. bolt caps 3. 15. Replace temporary spare wheel 3 with 11. Stow replaced wheel, tools and warning a full specification wheel without delay. triangle 3 in luggage compartment, 16. Initialise the deflation detection see pages 252 to 256. system 3 or tyre pressure monitoring 3 12. Check the tyre pressure of the newly system – pages 221, 224. fitted wheel. Adjust as necessary. 6. Change the wheel. Notes on spare wheel – page 254, notes on temporary spare wheel – page 255. 7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly, inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Tighten wheel bolts crosswise, putting on wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. Self-help 261

Tyre repair kit 3 Minor damage to the tyre tread or side wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, can be repaired using the tyre repair kit (does not apply to run-flat tyres). Do not remove the foreign body from the tyre. Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that is on the rim cannot be repaired with the tyre repair kit. 9 Warning

Driving with inadequate tyre pressure or The tyre repair kit is in a compartment 3. Remove the electrical connection cable a flat tyre can lead to hidden tyre under the floor cover luggage and air hose from the stowage damage, which cannot be eliminated by compartment. compartments on the underside of the using the tyre repair kit. Park the vehicle compressor. and consult a workshop. We recommend 1. Take the pouch with the tyre repair kit your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. from the compartment. Carefully remove the components from the pouch. Important information – page 264. 2. Remove the compressor. In the event of a flat tyre: z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply hand brake, automatic transmission 3 - selector lever in P , manual transmission or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse gear. z Correctly set up the warning triangle 3, warning triangle – page 252. 262 Self-help

4. Screw the compressor air hose to the 7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve. 10. Set the rocker switch on the connection on the sealant bottle. 8. The switch on the compressor must be compressor to I. The tyre is filled with 5. Fit the sealant bottle in the retainer on set to §. sealant. the compressor. 9. Connect the compressor plug to the 11. While the sealant bottle drains (approx. Set the compressor near the tyre in such accessory socket or cigarette lighter 30 seconds) the pressure indicator on a way that the sealant bottle is upright. socket. Accessory socket – page 107. the compressor briefly points to 6 bar. Pressure then sinks again. 6. Remove the valve cap from the defective To avoid discharging the battery, we tyre. recommend running the engine. 12. All of the sealant is pumped into the tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled with air. 13. The prescribed tyre pressure – page 333 should be reached within 10 minutes. Switch off the compressor when the correct pressure is obtained. Self-help 263

Drain excess tyre pressure with the button over the pressure indicator. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes - see "Important information" on page 264. 14. Detach the tyre repair kit. Screw the filler hose to the free connection on the sealant bottle. This prevents sealant leakage. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage compartment. 15. Wipe away any sealant spill with a cloth. 16. Disassemble the warning triangle 3 If the prescribed tyre pressure is not and store in luggage compartment If tyre pressure is more than 1.3 bar, reached within 10 minutes, detach the – page 252. adjust to the prescribed value. Repeat tyre repair kit. Move the vehicle one tyre the procedure until there is no more 17. The enclosed sticker shows the revolution (approx. 2 metres) in or pressure loss. maximum permitted speed at which the against the flow of traffic. Reconnect tyre repair may be used. Apply sticker in If tyre pressure is below 1.3, the vehicle the tyre repair kit and continue the the driver’s field of vision. must not be driven. Consult a workshop. filling procedure for 10 minutes. If the We recommend your Vauxhall 18. Continue driving immediately to allow prescribed tyre pressure is still not Authorised Repairer. reached, the tyre is too badly the sealant to distribute evenly damaged. Park the vehicle and consult throughout the tyre. Stop after approx. 19. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage a workshop. We recommend your 6 miles / 10 km (no more than 10 compartment – page 261. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. minutes) and check tyre pressure. Screw the compressor air hose directly onto the tyre valve (see Fig. 17256 T). 264 Self-help

Important The sealant can only be stored for approx. Electrical system 4 years. After this time, the sealing 9 Warning properties can no longer be guaranteed. 9 Warning Heed the expiration date on the sealant Do not drive faster than 50 mph bottle. Electronic ignition systems generate very (80 km/h). high voltages. Do not touch the ignition The sealant bottle can only be used once. system; high voltage can be fatal. Do not use the temporary spare wheel for Replace a used sealant bottle. a lengthy period. The compressor and sealant can be used Fuses Steerability and driving behaviour may from approx. -30 °C. The vehicle has two fuse boxes: one behind be impaired. a cover on the left side of the luggage Dispose of a used tyre repair kit in compartment and one in the front left of accordance with applicable legislation. The driving comfort of the repaired tyre is the engine compartment. severely affected, therefore have this tyre The adapters supplied 3 can be used to replaced. inflate other items e.g. footballs, air mattresses, inflatable dinghies etc. If the compressor makes abnormal noises or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least They are located on the underside of the 30 minutes. compressor. To remove, screw on compressor air hose and withdraw The integrated safety valve opens at a adapter. pressure of 7 bar. When using the tyre repair set, no Protect the compressor from moisture and consumers may be connected to the front rain. accessory socket. Self-help 265

We recommend carrying a complete set of Different versions of fuses are used. spare fuses –available from your Vauxhall Fuse Fuse Authorised Repairer. Store spare fuses in Fuse Fuse colour rating the fuse box in the luggage compartment. colour rating Blue 20 A Open cover, see page 266. Brownish yellow 5 A Transparent 25 A Before replacing a fuse, turn off the Brown 7.5 A Pink 30 A respective switch and the ignition. Red 10 A Green 40 A A blown fuse (see figures to the right) can Blue 15 A be recognised by its melted wire. Do not Yellow 20 A install a new fuse until the cause of the Transparent 25 A fault has been remedied. Green 30 A 266 Self-help

There is a fuse extractor in the luggage Place the fuse extractor on the various Only fit fuses of the specified current compartment fuse box to facilitate types of fuse from the top or side, and rating. Each fuse has its current rating replacement of fuses - see figure above for withdraw fuse. written on it, in addition the ratings are an example. colour coded. Fuses and the most important circuits they protect Fuse box in luggage compartment Depending on the equipment version, there are two different fuse boxes for differing electrical circuits. z Version A – see figure 18453 T, z Version B – see figure 17958 T Astra TwinTop always has version B. Spare fuses, fuse extractor – page 264. The fuse box is located on the left side of the luggage compartment behind a cover. Do not store any objects behind the cover. Self-help 267

5-door saloon, Astra TwinTop Fuse box, version A Estate, van To open, pull the two knobs, remove the Some functions are protected by several To open, turn both catches with a coin and clips and fold the cover upwards. fuses. To replace a fuse, pull off its fold cover down. protective cap. 3-door hatch No Circuit Rating To open, fold the cover upwards. . 1 Luggage compartment 15 A socket 2 Rear socket 15 A 3 Electric 30 A windows, front 4 Electric 30 A windows, rear 5 Reversing lights 7.5 A 6 Air conditioning system 10 A 7 Heated exterior mirrors 7.5 A 268 Self-help

Fuse box, version B No Circuit Rating Some functions are protected by several . fuses. 13 Parking distance sensor 5 A No Circuit Rating 14 Heating, 7.5 . air conditioning system 1 Electric 25 A 15 –– windows, front 16 Seat occupancy recognition, 5 A 2 –– Open&Start system 3 Instruments 7.5 A 17 Rain sensor, 5 A 4 Heating, 5 A air quality sensor, air conditioning system, tyre pressure monitoring climate control system system, 5 Airbags 7.5 A interior mirror 6 ––18 Instruments, switches 5 A 7 ––19 –– 8 ––20 CDC 10 A 9 ––21 heated exterior mirrors 7.5 A 10 ––22 Sun roof 20 A 11 Heated rear window 25 A 23 Electric 25 A 12 Tailgate wiper 15 A windows, rear Self-help 269

No Circuit Rating . 38 Central locking system, 25 A clamp 30 39 Seat heater (left) 15 A 40 Seat heater (right) 15 A 41 –– 42 –– 43 –– 44 ––

No Circuit Rating No Circuit Rating . . 24 Diagnostics plug 7.5 A 32 –– 25 ––33 Open&Start system 15 A 26 Electrically retractable 7.5 A 34 Sun roof, TwinTop 25 A exterior mirrors 35 Rear socket 15 A 27 Ultrasonic sensor, 5 A 36 Towing equipment 20 A Vauxhall alarm system 37 –– 28 –– 29 Cigarette lighter, 15 A front socket 30 Rear socket 15 A 31 –– 270 Self-help

Depending on the equipment version, Fuse layout, version A there are two different fuse layouts for the Some functions are protected by several engine compartment fuse box, handling fuses. different electrical circuits: No Circuit Rating z If the luggage compartment fuse box is . version A - see Fig. 18453 T on page 267 - the fuse layout in the engine 1 ABS 20 A compartment is version A – see next 2 ABS 30 A column. 3 Interior fan 30 A z If the luggage compartment fuse box is climate control system version B – see Fig. 17958 T on page 269 4 Interior fan, 30 A - the fuse layout in the engine heating, compartment is version B – see next air conditioning system page. 5 Radiator fan 11) 30 A Fuse box in engine compartment Astra TwinTop always has version B. 40 A The fuse box is at the front left side of the engine compartment. Spare fuses, fuse extractor – page 264. 9 Warning

Turn off engine before opening engine compartment fuse box; risk of injury – page 297.

To open the cover, release the catch by inserting a screwdriver into the opening as far as it will go and swivelling it to the side. Open the cover upwards and remove.

1) Different ratings depending on engine and equipment level. Self-help 271

No Circuit Rating . 21 Engine electronics 20 A 22 Engine electronics 7.5 A 23 Headlight range adjustment 5 A 24 Fuel pump 15 A 25 –– 26 Engine electronics 10 A 27 Heating, 7.5 A air conditioning system, air quality sensor 28 –– No Circuit Rating No Circuit Rating . . 29 Power steering 5 A 6 Radiator fan 21) 20 A 14 Windscreen wiper 30 A 30 Engine electronics 10 A 30 A 15 Windscreen wiper 30 A 31 Tailgate wiper 15 A 40 A 16 Horn, 5 A 32 Brake light switch 5 A 7 Central locking system 20 A ABS, 33 Headlight range 5 A 8 Windscreen wash system, 10 A brake light switch, adjustment, tailgate air conditioning system light switch, 9 Heated rear window, 30 A 17 Diesel filter 25 A clutch switch, heated exterior mirrors or 20 A instrument assembly, driver’s door module 10 Diagnostics plug 7.5 A air conditioning system 18 Starter 25 A 34 Control unit 7.5 A 11 Instruments 7.5 A Steering column module 19 –– 12 Mobile telephone, 7.5 A 35 Infotainment system 20 A digital radio, 20 Horn 15 A Twin Audio, 36 Cigarette lighter, 15 A display front socket 13 Courtesy light 5 A

1) Different ratings depending on engine and equipment level. 272 Self-help

Fuse layout, version B No Circuit Rating No Circuit Rating Some functions are protected by several . . fuses. 7 Windscreen wash system 10 A 16 Electronics control units, 5 A No Circuit Rating 8 Horn 15 A Open&Start system, . ABS, 9 Headlight wash system 25 A 1 ABS 20 A brake light switch, 10 –– 2 ABS 30 A TwinTop 11 –– 3 Interior fan 30 A 17 Diesel filter heating 25 A climate control system 12 ––18 Starter 25 A 4 Interior fan, 30 A 13 Fog lights 15 A 19 Transmission electronics 30 A heating, 14 Windscreen wiper 30 A 20 Air conditioning system 10 A air conditioning system 15 Windscreen wiper 30 A 21 Engine electronics 20 A 5 Radiator fan 11) 30 A 22 Engine electronics 7.5 A 40 A 23 Adaptive Forward Lighting, 10 A 6 Radiator fan 21) 20 A headlight range adjustment 30 A 40 A

1) Different ratings depending on engine and equipment level. Self-help 273

No Circuit Rating No Circuit Rating . . 24 Fuel pump 15 A 31 Adaptive Forward Lighting, 10 A 25 Transmission electronics 15 A headlight range adjustment 26 Engine electronics 10 A 32 Brake system, 5 A air conditioning system, 27 Power steering 5 A clutch switch 28 Transmission electronics 5 A 33 Adaptive Forward Lighting, 5 A 29 Transmission electronics 7.5 A headlight range adjustment, 30 Engine electronics 10 A light switch 34 Control unit, 7.5 A steering column module 35 Infotainment system 20 A 36 Mobile telephone, 7.5 A digital radio, Twin Audio, display 274 Self-help

Bulb replacement Before replacing a bulb, switch ignition off and switch relevant switch off. Only hold new bulb at base! Do not touch the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise fingerprints on the glass evaporate. Residue builds up on the reflector eventually resulting in a dull reflector. Inadvertently stained bulbs may be cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using alcohol or white spirits. The replacement bulb must be in accordance with the data on the base of the defective bulb. Do not exceed wattage The bulbs of the front outer lights are given on bulb base. Halogen headlight system replaced through openings in the front Headlights with separate systems for main wheel arch: turn relevant wheels to gain beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2 access, release catch and remove cover. (outer bulbs). Headlight aiming We recommend that headlight aiming be carried out by your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will have special equipment. When adjusting headlights, headlight range adjustment must be set to 0. Self-help 275

Dipped beam 3. Rotate left bulb holder and disengage. 4. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from 1. Replace bulb through opening the front the reflector. wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain access, release catch and remove cover – page 274. 2. Remove headlight protective cover. 276 Self-help

5. Detach bulb from bulb holder. Main beam 5. Disengage spring clip from retainer by 6. Insert new bulb into bulb holder, 1. Open bonnet and engage support. pressing forward and then swing downward. without touching the glass. 2. Replace bulbs from engine 7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on compartment out. 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing. the bulb holder engage in the recesses To replace the bulb on the right-hand 7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the in the reflector. side, remove the air hose from the air lugs in the recesses on the reflector 8. Rotate bulb holder to right as far as it filter. without touching the glass. will go. To replace the bulb on the left-hand 9. Place headlight protective cover in side, remove the plug from the fuse position and close. box. 10. Position cover on opening in wheel arch 3. Remove headlight protective cover. and engage. 4. Detach plug connector from bulb. Self-help 277

8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector onto bulb. 9. Place headlight protective cover in position and close. After bulb replacement on the right- hand side, reattach air hose to air filter and engage. After bulb replacement on the left- hand side, reconnect the fuse box plug and engage.

Parking lights 4. Remove parking light socket from 1. Open bonnet and engage support. reflector. 2. Replace bulbs from engine compartment 6 out. To replace the bulb on the right-hand side, remove the air hose from the air filter. To replace the bulb on the left-hand side, remove the plug from the fuse box. 3. Remove main beam headlight protective cover. 278 Self-help

5. Remove bulb from socket. Xenon headlight system 3, Main beam 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the Adaptive Forward Lighting 1. Replace bulb through opening the front glass. system 3 wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain 7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight Headlights with separate systems for access, release catch and remove cover protective cap in position and close. dipped beam 1 (inner bulbs) and main – page 274. beam 2 (outer bulbs). After bulb replacement on the right- 2. Remove headlight protective cover. hand side, reattach air hose to air filter Dipped beam and engage. 9 Warning After bulb replacement on the left-hand side, reconnect the fuse box plug and The dipped beam operates at very high engage. voltage. Do not touch; high voltage can be fatal. Have bulbs changed by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Self-help 279

3. Rotate left bulb holder and disengage. 4. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from 5. Detach bulb from bulb holder. the reflector. 6. Insert new bulb into bulb holder, without touching the glass. 7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on the bulb holder engage in the recesses in the reflector. 8. Rotate bulb holder to right as far as it will go. 9. Place headlight protective cover in position and close. 10. Position cover on opening in wheel arch and engage. 280 Self-help

Parking lights 4. Remove parking light socket from 5. Remove bulb from socket. 1. Open bonnet and engage support. reflector. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the 2. Replace bulb through opening the front glass. wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain 7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight access, release catch and remove cover protective cap in position and close. – page 274. 8. Position cover on opening in wheel arch 3. Remove main beam headlight protective and engage. cover. Self-help 281

6. Insert light holder in reflector, rotate clockwise and engage in position. 7. Position cover on opening in wheel arch and engage. Fog lights 3 Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Front indicator lights 4. Push bulb into socket slightly, rotate left 1. Open bonnet and engage support. and remove. 2. Replace bulb through opening the front 5. Insert new bulb, without touching the wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain glass. access, release catch and remove cover – page 274. 3. Rotate bulb holder to left and disengage. 282 Self-help

Tail lights 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Detach bulb housing towards the rear. Hatch 5-door 3. Hold outside of bulb housing, loosen 1. To replace bulbs on the right side, use a fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3 coin to open the lock as indicated in the and unscrew by hand. Wheel bolt Fig. and fold the cover down. wrench 3 – see vehicle tools on To replace bulbs on the left side, use a page 256. coin to turn both locks as illustrated on page 266 in Fig. 17261 T and fold the cover down. Self-help 283

6. Remove bulb from socket. 7. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing, ensuring that it properly engages. Insert three screws with washers and tighten as far as possible.

5. Unscrew three screws using a screwdriver Bulbs in bulb holder: (vehicle tools – page 256). Press locking 1 = Reversing light tabs on outside of bulb holder inward 2 = Turn signal and remove the bulb holder. 3 = Tail light/brake light 4 = Tail light 5 = Fog tail light 284 Self-help

11. Carry out the following steps to ensure proper function of the tail lights: – Switch on ignition – Operate brake – Switch on parking lights

9. Ensure that the seals are applied to the 10. Insert the bulb housing in the body, bulb holder and fixing screws. engaging the lug and the ball pin in the recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach the plug connector. Close and engage the flap. Self-help 285

Hatch 3-door 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Detach bulb housing towards the rear. 1. To replace bulbs, fold the cover down. 3. Hold outside of bulb housing, loosen fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3 and unscrew by hand. Wheel bolt wrench 3 – see vehicle tools on page 256. 286 Self-help

6. Remove bulb from socket. 7. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing, ensuring that it properly engages.

5. Remove the round seal from the Bulbs in bulb holder: fastening bolt. Press the locking tabs on 1 = Reversing light the outside of the bulb holder outward 2 = Turn signal and remove the bulb holder. 3 = Tail light/brake light 4 = Tail light 5 = Fog tail light Self-help 287

11. Carry out the following steps to ensure proper function of the tail lights: – Switch on ignition – Operate brake – Switch on parking lights

9. Ensure that the seals are applied to the 10. Insert the bulb housing in the body, bulb holder and fixing screws. engaging the lug and the ball pin in the recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach the plug connector. Close and engage the flap. 288 Self-help

Estate, van 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Unscrew the three screws with a 1. Disengage cover by pressing retaining 3. Hold the outside of the bulb housing, screwdriver (vehicle tools – page 256) lugs and remove. unscrew the three fastening nuts and and remove the bulb holder. remove the bulb housing rearwards. Self-help 289

6. Insert new bulb without touching the glass. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing and screw in place. Insert bulb housing into body and tighten fastening nuts by hand. Attach plug connector. Close and lock cover. 7. Carry out the following steps to ensure proper function of the tail lights: – Switch on ignition – Operate brake – Switch on parking lights

Bulbs in bulb holder: Astra TwinTop 1 = Tail light/brake light 1. Unscrew retaining nuts. 2 = Turn signal 3 = Reversing light 6 4 = Fog tail light 5. Remove bulb from socket. 290 Self-help

2. Remove bulb housing from outside. 4. Disengage sockets by turning and Bulbs in bulb holder: Disengage plug by pressing on flap and remove. 1 = Tail light/brake light remove from bulb holder. Press locking tabs on the long sides of 2 = Tail light 3. Detach seal from bulb holder. the bulb holder outwards; lift bulb holder 3 = Fog tail light at front end (arrow) and remove. 4 = Reversing light 5 = Turn signal Self-help 291

5. Remove bulb from socket. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 7. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing by first inserting the lug in the front of the plug. Fold together bulb holder, ensuring that it engages properly. Insert sockets and engage by turning.

8. Fit seal on bulb holder as illustrated. Number plate light Ensure that the seal is flat in the area of 1. Insert screwdriver vertically in bulb insert the screws. as illustrated in figure. Press to the side 9. Engage plug. Insert light housing in and release spring. body, ensuring proper positioning of the ball pins in the recesses. Tighten the retaining nuts. 10. Carry out the following steps to ensure proper function of the tail lights: – Switch on ignition – Operate brake – Switch on parking lights 292 Self-help

2. Remove bulb housing downward, taking 4. Rotate bulb socket anticlockwise and Courtesy lights care not to pull on the cable. disengage. Front courtesy light, reading lights 3 3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb 5. Remove bulb from socket. To ensure that no power is supplied to the lights, close the doors before removing. socket. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 1. Disengage lens by hand at location illustrated in figure, press it downward 7. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing and slightly and remove at a downward twist to right. angle. 8. Connect plug to bulb socket. 2. Remove bulb from socket. 9. Insert and engage bulb housing. 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 4. Mount lens and engage in position. Self-help 293

Rear courtesy lights 3 , rear reading lights 3 Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Glove compartment lighting, 2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip luggage compartment lighting, and remove. 3 foot well lighting 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the To ensure that no power is supplied to the glass. lights, close the doors or hold the contact switch depressed before removing. 4. Insert light in opening and engage in position. 1. Prise the light out with a screwdriver. Instrument illumination, Information display illumination 3 Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 294 If you have a problem

The majority of areas of concern can be the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be If you have a problem quickly resolved in this way. advised accordingly. In any case, your Should you wish to pursue the matter contact will be acknowledged confirming further, the Principal of the Vauxhall Vauxhall Motors’ position in the matter. Authorised Repairer should be made If you are not satisfied with the outcome, aware of your concern. It is advisable in you can if you wish, seek advice from an cases such as this to write to him to confirm independent third party such as: your problem and the solutions that have Automobile Association (A.A.) been offered. Fanum House, You can be assured the Authorised BASINGSTOKE, Repairer’s Principal will only be too anxious Hants., RG21 2EA to fully investigate your problems and Royal Automobile Club (R.A.C.), correct any errors made. After all, he has a R.A.C. Motoring Services Ltd., In our experience the most common cause large investment in his business and is 89-91 Pall Mall, of all complaints is the result of proud of his reputation and LONDON, SW1Y S45 misunderstanding or lack of professionalism and fully realises that communication between the customer and satisfied customers are his key to success. The Customer Relations Department, the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Society of Motor Manufacturers and In the unlikely event that you are still not Traders Ltd. (S.M.M.T.), We sincerely hope you will never have happy with the answer your Vauxhall Forbes House, Halkin Street, cause to complain about your vehicle. Authorised Repairer has given, or the LONDON, SW1X 7DS However, if things do go wrong, the best action he proposes to correct the problem, course of action for you to take is to you may contact the Customer Care Customer Complaints Service, contact your Vauxhall Authorised Department1) where a team of Customer Scottish Motor Trade Association, Repairer’s Service Reception Staff and Care Consultants will spare no effort to (S.M.T.A.), explain the difficulty you are having. We ensure your complete satisfaction. 3 Palmerston Place, EDINBURGH, EH12 5AQ are confident they will do their utmost to Vauxhall Motors Ltd. resolve the problem to your complete Customer Care, The National Conciliation Service, satisfaction. Griffin House, Retail Motor Industry Federation, Sometimes, however, despite the best of Osborne Road, 9 North Street, intentions of all concerned, LUTON, RUGBY, CV21 2AB misunderstandings can occur. If your Beds., LU1 3YT If you have a problem whilst abroad:The problem has not been resolved to your Telephone: 01582 427200 Service Departments of ADAM satisfaction, please make an appointment They will review all the facts involved. Then GmbH and branches to discuss the matter with the Manager of if it is felt some further action can be taken, everywhere will provide information and the department concerned. 1) Calls may be monitored and recorded for assistance: training purposes. If you have a problem 295

In Luxembourg, please contact General Motors Hellas S.A. General Motors Southeast Europe, the General Motors Service Department in 56 Kifisias Avenue & Delfon str. org. zložka Antwerp – Belgium Amarousion Apollo Business Centre Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 29 151 25 Athens – Greece Mlynské Nivy 45 General Motors Austria GmbH Tel. 00 30-1-6 80 65 01 821 09 Bratislava – Slovakia Groß-Enzersdorfer Str. 59 General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd. Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543 1220 Vienna – Austria Szabadsag utca 117 General Motors España S.L. Tel. 00 43 1-2 88 77 444 or 2040 Budaörs – Hungary Paseo de la Castellana, 91 00 43-1-2 88 77 0 Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 28046 Madrid – Spain General Motors Belgium N.V. Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25 Noorderlaan 401 – Haven 500 Sixth Floor, Tower A General Motors Norden AB 2030 Antwerp – Belgium Global Business Park Årstaängvägen 17 Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 29 Mehrauli – Gurgaon Road 100 73 Stockholm – Sweden General Motors Southeast Europe, Gurgaon – 122 022, Haryana – India Tel. 00 46-20 333 000 org. složka Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333 General Motors Suisse S.A. Olbrachtova 9 General Motors Ireland Ltd. Stelzenstraße 4 140 00 Prague – Czech Republic Opel House, Unit 60, Heather Road 8152 Glattbrugg – Switzerland Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321 Sandyford, Dublin 18 – Ireland Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80 General Motors Danmark Tel. 00 353-1-216 10 00 General Motors Türkiye Ltd. Sti. Jaegersborg Alle 4 General Motors Italia Srl Kemalpasa yolu üzeri 2920 Charlottenlund – Denmark Piazzale dell’Industria 40 35861 Torbali/Izmir – Turkey Tel. 00 45-39 97 85 00 00144 Rome – Italy Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53 Vauxhall Motors Ltd. Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51 Customer Care General Motors Nederland B.V. Griffin House, Osborne Road Lage Mosten 49 – 63 In Albania, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Luton, Bedfordshire, LU1 3YT – England 4822 NK Breda – Netherlands Bulgaria, Croatia, Estonia, Tel. 00 44-15 82-42 72 00 Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00 Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia, General Motors Finland Oy General Motors Norge AS Romania, Serbia-Montenegro Pajuniityntie 5 Kjeller-Vest 6 00320 Helsinki – Finland 2027 Kjeller – Norway and Slovenia Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47 Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04 please contact the Opel General Motors France General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o. Service Department in Budaörs – Hungary 1 – 9, avenue du Marais Domaniewska 41 Telephone 00 36-23 446 100 Angle Quai de Bezons 06-672 Warsaw – Poland 95101 Argenteuil Cedex – France Tel. 00 48-22-606 17 00 Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51 General Motors Portugal GmbH Quinta da Fonte Bahnhofsplatz 1 Edificío Fernão Magalhães, Piso 2 65423 Rüsselsheim – 2780-190 Paço d’Arcos – Portugal Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or Tel. 00 351-21 440 75 00 00 49-61 42-7 70 296 Maintenance, Inspection System

The service interval display takes account Maintenance, of off-the-road periods during which the Inspection System battery is disconnected. For vehicles with flexible engine oil change and service intervals, the length of these intervals is based on several parameters stemming from usage. For this reason, various engine-specific data is continually gathered and is used to calculate the remaining distance until the next service. This remaining distance can be displayed with the ignition off: briefly press the trip odometer reset button, the mileage reading shows. Press the button again for In order to guarantee economical and safe around 2 seconds, InSP and the remaining A note on safety ...... 297 vehicle operation and to maintain the distance is shown. value of your vehicle, it is of vital Checking and topping up fluids...... 297 If the remaining distance is less than 1000 Engine oil...... 298 importance that all maintenance work is carried out at the proper intervals as miles (1500 km), InsP is displayed with a Diesel fuel filter ...... 300 specified by Vauxhall. remaining distance of 600 miles (1000 km) Coolant...... 300 when the ignition is switched on and off. Brake fluid ...... 302 In vehicles with a fixed engine oil change InsP is displayed for several seconds if the Windscreen wiper ...... 303 and service interval, InSP appears in the remaining distance is less than 600 miles odometer display when the ignition is Windscreen and headlight wash (1000 km). Have the service work that is switched on if the vehicle is due for service. systems 3...... 305 due carried out within one week or 300 Have service work performed within a week Battery...... 306 miles (500 km). Have this work carried out or 300 miles (500 km). We recommend your by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer in order Protecting electronic components ..... 306 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. to avoid invalidation of warranty claims. Vehicle decommissioning...... 307 Vehicle recommissioning...... 307 Maintenance, Inspection System 297

Further information on maintenance and the inspection system can be found in the service booklet, which is in the glove compartment. Have maintenance work, as well as repairs to the bodywork and equipment, carried out by a professional. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who is familiar with Vauxhall vehicles and in possession of the necessary special tools and the latest service instructions from Vauxhall. It is particularly advisable to use a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer during the warranty period to avoid invalidation of warranty claims. See the Service Booklet for A note on safety Never carry out any repairs or adjustment further information. To avoid injury from moving parts and and maintenance work on the vehicle Separate anti-corrosion service cables conducting ignition voltage, only yourself. This especially applies to the Have the work carried out at the intervals carry out engine compartment checks engine, chassis and safety parts. You may specified in the Service Booklet. We (e.g. checking brake fluid or engine oil unwittingly infringe the provisions of the recommend your Vauxhall Authorised level) when the ignition is switched off. law and, by not performing the work Repairer. properly, endanger yourself and other 9 Warning road users.

The cooling fan is controlled by a Checking and topping up fluids thermoswitch and can therefore start To aid identification, the caps used when unexpectedly even if the ignition is topping up engine oil, coolant and wash switched off. Risk of injury. fluid as well as the oil dipstick are coloured yellow. Electronic ignition systems generate very high voltages. Do not touch the ignition system; high voltage can be fatal. 298 Maintenance, Inspection System

Engine oil The engine oil level 3 is checked Checking the engine oil level, 1) Information on engine oils is found in the automatically , see page 40. Before topping up engine oil Service Booklet. embarking on a long journey it is advisable The figures on this page indicate checks on to check the engine oil level. one petrol and two diesel engines. Engine oil level and consumption Every engine consumes engine oil for The oil level must be checked with the technical reasons. The engine oil vehicle on a level surface and with the consumption cannot be assessed until a engine (which must be at operating fairly long distance has been driven, and temperature) switched off. Wait at least 5 may be above the specified value when the minutes before checking the level to allow vehicle is first being driven (run-in period). the normal engine oil accumulation in the Frequent driving at high revs increases engine to drain into the oil pan. engine oil consumption. 9 Warning

It is the Owner’s Responsibility to maintain the proper level of an appropriate quality oil in the engine.

1) Not on Z 14 XEP or Z 20 LEH engine. Sales designation – see page 314. Maintenance, Inspection System 299

To check the engine oil level, insert wiped Top up with the same brand of engine oil Engine oil change, oil filter change oil dipstick into handle as far as it will go. that was used during the previous oil Change the oil at the displayed service Top engine oil up if the level has dropped change, following the instructions in the intervals. into the range of the top-up mark MIN. service booklet. We recommend that you use genuine The engine oil level must not exceed the To close, position the cap and screw it into Vauxhall engine oil filters. upper mark MAX on the dipstick. Excess place. engine oil must be drained off or extracted. Capacities – pages 343, 343. 9 Warning If the engine oil level is above the MAX mark there is a risk of damage to the Drained engine oil filters cannot be engine or the catalytic converter. placed with domestic refuse. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Capacity between MIN and MAX marks Repairer for engine oil and filter change. – pages 343, 343. He is familiar with the legal requirements on the disposal of old oil and filters. This ensures protection for the environment and your health. 300 Maintenance, Inspection System

Diesel fuel filter Coolant Check fuel filter for any water residue when The glycol-based coolant provides each engine oil change takes place. We excellent corrosion protection for the recommend that you consult your Vauxhall heating and cooling systems as well as Authorised Repairer. antifreeze protection down to –28 °C. It Illumination of A indicates water in the remains in the cooling system throughout fuel filter 3. the year and need not be changed. Have fuel filter checked at shorter intervals Use of certain antifreezes can lead to if the vehicle is subjected to extreme engine damage. We therefore recommend operating conditions such as high humidity that you use antifreezes that have been (primarily in coastal areas), extremely high approved by Vauxhall. or low outside temperatures and substantially varying daytime and night- 9 Warning time temperatures. Antifreeze is a danger to health; it must Antifreeze and corrosion protection therefore be kept in the original container Before the start of the cold weather season, and out of the reach of children. have the coolant checked for correct concentration. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The amount of antifreeze must provide protection down to approx. –28 °C. If the antifreeze concentration is too low, this reduces protection from freezing and corrosion. Top up antifreeze if necessary. If coolant loss is topped up with water, have concentration checked and add antifreeze if necessary. Maintenance, Inspection System 301

When the engine is at operating Coolant temperature temperature, coolant level rises. It falls Control indicator W illuminates when again when the system cools. If it falls coolant temperature is too high. Check below the KALT/COLD mark when the coolant level immediately: system is cold, top up to the mark. z Coolant level low: Top up antifreeze. If no antifreeze is Top up coolant. Pay attention to the available, top up with clean tap water. If instructions given under "Antifreeze and tap water is unavailable, distilled water corrosion protection" and "Coolant can be used. level". Have the cause of coolant loss After topping up with drinking water or remedied. We recommend that you distilled water, check the anti-freeze level consult your Vauxhall Authorised and add anti-freeze if required. Eliminate Repairer. the cause of the coolant loss. We z Coolant level OK: recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Have the cause of increased coolant Coolant level Repairer. temperature remedied. Consult a Hardly any losses occur since the cooling Too low a coolant level can cause engine workshop. We recommend your system is sealed and it is thus rarely Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. necessary to top up the coolant. damage. The coolant should be a little above the To close, position the cap and screw it into KALT/COLD mark in the expansion tank place. with a cold cooling system. The coolant level can also be read off from the outside of the expansion tank. 9 Warning

Allow engine to cool down before removing coolant filler cap. Remove filler cap carefully so that pressure can escape slowly, otherwise there is a risk of scalding. 302 Maintenance, Inspection System

Use of certain brake fluids can lead to Brake fluid change damage or reduced braking effect. We Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it absorbs therefore recommend that you use only water. If the brakes become hot, such as high performance brake fluid approved by when driving on long downhill stretches, Vauxhall. vapour bubbles can occur in the water, When topping up, ensure maximum which can have an extremely adverse cleanliness as contamination of the brake effect on braking power (depending on the fluid can lead to function problems in the proportion of water). braking system. The fluid change intervals specified in the After correcting the brake fluid level, have Service Booklet must therefore be the cause of brake fluid loss remedied. We observed. recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 9 Warning Brake fluid We recommend that you have brake fluid changed by a Vauxhall Authorised Brake fluid level Repairer, who will be familiar with the 9 Warning requirements of the law as regards disposal of brake fluid and can thus help Caution – brake fluid is poisonous and to protect the environment and your corrosive. Do not allow it to come into health. contact with eyes, skin, fabric or painted surfaces. Direct contact could cause injury and damage.

The fluid level in the reservoir must be neither higher than the MAX mark nor lower than the MIN mark. Maintenance, Inspection System 303

Windscreen wiper If the wiper becomes frozen on to the glass, Clear vision is essential for safe driving. we recommend that they be released with the aid of VauxhallDe-icer Spray. Perform regular checks on the windscreen wiper and headlight wash system 3 to Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with ensure they are operating correctly. We a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen recommend wiper blade replacement at Wash Solvent. least once a year. Wiper blades whose lips have become If the windscreen is dirty, operate the hardened, cracked or covered with silicone windscreen wash system before switching must be replaced. This may be necessary on the windscreen wiper or setting the as a result of the effects of ice, thawing salt wiper to automatic operation with the rain or heat, or the incorrect use of cleaning sensor 3. This will avoid wiper blade wear. agents. Do not switch on the windscreen wiper or Switch off the windscreen wiper or set them to automatic operation with the automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 in car To ensure proper operation of the rain rain sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced up as washes – pages 17, 18, 309. sensor 3 the sensor area must be free from this could damage the wiper blades or the Windscreen wiper care – page 310. dust, dirt and ice, which is why the wiper system. windscreen wash system must be operated at regular intervals and the sensor area de- iced. Vehicles with rain sensor 3 can be identified by the sensor area near the top of the windscreen. 304 Maintenance, Inspection System

Service setting for front windscreen wiper Wiper blades on the windscreen Wiper blade on the rear window 3 (e.g. for changing or cleaning the front Activate service setting - see previous Lift wiper arm. Disengage wiper blade as wiper blades). column. Raise wiper arm, tilt wiper blade at shown in illustration and remove. Within 4 seconds from turning off the a 90° to the wiper arm and remove to the ignition, with the key still in the lock 3 or for side. the Open&Start System after switching off the ignition and before opening the driver’s door, press the wiper stalk down. Release wiper stalk as soon as the wiper is vertical. Maintenance, Inspection System 305

The windscreen wash system and headlight wash system will not freeze in winter:

Frost protection Mixture down to Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent: Water – 5 °C 1 : 3 – 10 °C 1 : 2 – 20 °C 1 : 1 – 30 °C 2 : 1

When closing the reservoir, press the lid Windscreen and headlight firmly over the beaded edge all the way wash systems 3 round. The fluid reservoir filler neck for the windscreen wash system and headlight wash system 3 is located at the front next to the left headlight. Capacities – pages 343, 343. Fill only with clean water to prevent the nozzles from clogging. To improve cleaning efficiency, we recommend that you add a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent. 306 Maintenance, Inspection System

Laying up the vehicle for more than 4 Protecting electronic components weeks can lead to battery discharge, which In order to prevent faults in electronic may reduce the service life of the battery. components in the electrical system, never Disconnect battery from on-board power connect or disconnect battery with engine supply by detaching negative terminal running or ignition switched on. Never start (anti-theft alarm system 3 is then engine with battery disconnected, e.g. disabled). when starting using jump leads. Ensure that ignition is switched off before To avoid damaging the vehicle, do not connecting battery. Then perform the make any modifications to the electrical following actions: system, e. g. connecting additional z Setting date and time in the information consumers or tampering with electronic display – pages 48, 51, 56. control units (chip tuning). z If necessary activate the windows 3 and 9 Warning Battery sun roof 3 – pages 145, 146. The battery is maintenance-free. In order to prevent the battery from Electronic ignition systems generate very discharging, some consumers such as the high voltages. Do not touch the ignition 9 Warning courtesy light automatically switch off system; high voltage can be fatal. after approx. 20 minutes. We recommend that you have battery Disconnecting/connecting the battery changes carried out by a Vauxhall from/to the electrical system Authorised Repairer. They knows the laws Disconnect the battery from the vehicle concerning the disposal of used batteries electrical system before charging: First and therefore protects the environment detach the negative and then the positive and your health. lead. Do not reverse the polarity of the battery, i.e. do not confuse the terminals Retrofitted electrical or electronic for the positive and negative leads. When accessories can place an additional load connecting, start with the positive lead and on the battery or even discharge the then connect the negative lead. battery. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer regarding technical possibilities, such as fitting a more powerful battery. Maintenance, Inspection System 307

Vehicle decommissioning Vehicle storage Vehicle recommissioning Observe national regulations. z Park vehicle in dry, well ventilated place. Observe national regulations. With manual transmission or If the vehicle is decommissioned for several Easytronic 3, engage 1st or reverse Perform the following work before months, the following work must be carried gear. With automatic transmission 3 , recommissioning the vehicle: out in order to prevent damage. We selector lever in P. Use chocks or the like z Connect battery – see page 306. recommend that you consult your Vauxhall to prevent the vehicle from rolling. Authorised Repairer. z Check tyre pressure and correct if z Do not apply hand brake. necessary – page 334. z Wash and preserve the vehicle – page 309. z Disconnect battery by disengaging z Fill up windscreen wash system negative terminal from vehicle electrical – page 305. z Check corrosion protection in engine system – page 306. compartment and on underbody and z Check engine oil level – page 298. repair if necessary. z Check the coolant level; top up with z Clean and wax the rubber seals of the antifreeze if necessary – page 301. bonnet, doors and roof. Intermediate z Fit the number plate if necessary. position of the Astra TwinTop roof for cleaning – page 151. z Change engine oil – page 299. z Check antifreeze and corrosion protection – page 300. z Check the coolant level, top up with antifreeze if necessary – page 301. z Empty windscreen wash system and headlight wash system. z Increase tyre pressure to value specified for full load – page 334. 308 Vehicle care

Vehicle care Obtain advice from a Vauxhall Authorised Vehicle care aids 3 Repairer regarding cleaning materials that Vehicle wash: have been tested and recommended by z Wash brush Vauxhall. z Shampoo When caring for your vehicle, observe all z Sponge national environmental regulations, z Insect Removal Sponge particularly when washing it. z Chamois Regular, thorough care helps to improve Vehicle care: the appearance of your vehicle and z Paintwork Cleaner maintain its value over the years. It is also z Paintwork Polish prerequisite for warranty claims for any z Cream Polish Vehicle care aids 3...... 308 paint or corrosion damage. The following z Metallic Paintwork Wax Washing ...... 309 pages contain tips for vehicle care which, if z Hard wax z Waxing ...... 309 used properly, will help combat the VauxhallTouch-Up Paint z VauxhallTouch-Up/Aerosol Paint Polishing ...... 309 unavoidable, damaging effects of the environment. z Wheel Preserver Wheels ...... 309 z Insect Remover Paintwork damage...... 310 z Window Cleaner, Exterior lights ...... 310 z Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent Plastic and rubber parts ...... 310 z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals, Wheels and tyres ...... 310 z Cleaner Interior and upholstery...... 310 Seat belts...... 310 Windows...... 310 Windscreen wiper blades...... 310 Locks...... 311 Engine compartment...... 311 Underbody ...... 311 Astra TwinTop ...... 311 Vehicle care 309

Washing Clean edges and folds on opened doors Polishing The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to and flaps as well as the areas they cover. Polishing is necessary only if the paint has environmental influences, e.g. continuous Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the become dull or if solid deposits have changes in weather conditions, industrial vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use become attached to it. waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so separate leathers for paint and window Paintwork polish with silicone forms a wash and wax your vehicle regularly. When surfaces: remnants of wax on the windows protective film, making waxing using automatic car washes, select a will impair vision. unnecessary. programme which includes waxing. Observe national regulations. Plastic body parts should not be treated Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen with wax and polish. and the like should be cleaned off Waxing Use Metallic Paintwork Wax on vehicles immediately, as they contain aggressive Wax your vehicle regularly, in particular with a metallic-effect paint finish. constituents which can cause paint after it has been washed using shampoo damage. and at the latest when water no longer Wheels If using a car wash, comply with the forms beads on the paintwork, otherwise pertinent instructions of the car wash the paintwork will dry out. Use a pH-neutral wheel cleaning agent to clean the wheels. manufacturer. The windscreen wiper and Also wax edges and folds on opened doors rear window wiper must be switched off and flaps as well as the areas they cover. Wheels are painted and can be treated – pages 17, 18. Remove antenna 3 and with the same agents as the body. For alloy roof rack 3. Stand on the door sill to reach Sun roof 3 wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel them more easily. Preserver. Never clean with solvents or abrasive If you wash your vehicle by hand, make agents, fuels, aggressive media (e.g. paint sure that the insides of the wings are also cleaner, acetone-containing solutions etc.), thoroughly rinsed out. acidic or highly alkaline media or abrasive pads. No stickers may be applied to the sun roof. 310 Vehicle care

Paintwork damage Plastic and rubber parts Open Velcro fasteners on clothing could Repair small areas of paint damage such For additional cleaning of plastic and damage seat upholstery. Make sure Velcro as stone impacts, scratches etc. rubber parts use Cleaner. Do not use any fasteners are closed. immediately using a Vauxhalltouch-up other agent, and in particular do not use Seat belts applicator or Vauxhall spray and touch-up solvents or petrol. Always keep seat belts clean and dry. paint before rust can form. If rust has Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. already formed, have the cause remedied. Clean only with lukewarm water or Cleaner. We recommend that you consult your Wheels and tyres Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Please also Windows pay attention to surfaces and edges Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. When cleaning the heated rear window, beneath the vehicle where which rust may make sure that the heating element on the have formed unnoticed for some time. Interior and upholstery inside of the window is not damaged. Clean the vehicle interior, including the Exterior lights instrument panel fascia, using interior Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather cleaner. in conjunction with Window Cleaner and Headlight and other protective light bezels Insect Remover. are made of plastic. If they require The instrument panel should only be additional cleaning after the vehicle has cleaned using a soft damp cloth. Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is been washed, clean them with Car suitable for de-icing windows. Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum Shampoo. Do not use any abrasive or cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use For mechanical removal of ice, use a caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper, cleaner that is suitable for both fabrics and commercially available sharp-edged ice and do not clean them dry. vinyl. scraper. Press the scraper firmly against the glass so that no dirt can get under it Do not use cleaning agents such as and scratch the glass. acetone, tetrachloride, paint thinner, pint remover, nail varnish remover, washing Windscreen wiper blades powder or bleach. petrol is also unsuitable. Wax, such as that used in car washes, can cause streaks to form on the windscreen when the wiper is used. Vehicle care 311

Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with Protective wax that has been applied is Check the underbody after washing and a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen also removed during the engine wash. For have it waxed if necessary. Before the start Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary this reason, have the engine, brake system of the cold weather season, check the PVC – page 303. components in the engine compartment, coating and protective wax coating. Have axle components with steering, body parts them restored to perfect condition if Locks and cavities thoroughly preserved with necessary. The locks are lubricated with a high-grade protective wax after the wash. We Caution - commercially available bitumen/ lock cylinder grease at the factory. recommend that you consult your Vauxhall rubber materials can damage the PVC Vauxhall lock cylinder grease prevents the Authorised Repairer. coating. We recommend that you have locks from freezing up. Only use de-icing An engine wash can be performed in the underbody work carried out by a Vauxhall agent in emergencies, as they have a spring in order to remove dirt that has Authorised Repairer, who knows the degreasing effect and will impair the adhered to the engine compartment, prescribed materials and has experience in function of the locks. After using a de-icing which may also have a high salt content. the use thereof. agent, have the locks re-greased. We Check protective wax layer and make good The underbody should be washed recommend that you entrust this to your if necessary. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. following the end of the cold weather Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. season to remove any dirt adhering to the Engine compartment underbody since this may also contain salt. Underbody Check protective wax coating and, if Areas of the engine compartment that are Your vehicle has a factory-applied PVC necessary, have it restored to perfect painted in the same colour as the vehicle condition. must be looked after like any other painted undercoating in the wheel arches surface. (including the longitudinal members) which provides permanent protection and needs Astra TwinTop It is advisable to wash the engine no special maintenance. The surfaces of Treat all seals, e. g. on the roof and compartment before and after winter and the vehicle underbody not covered by PVC windscreen frame, with silicone oil from preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and are provided with a durable protective wax time to time. Good contact between the brake fluid reservoir with plastic sheets coating in critical areas. fine rubber lips and the sealing surfaces before washing the engine. On vehicles which are washed frequently in prevents leaks and reduces clamping When washing the engine with a steam-jet automatic car washes with underbody forces. cleaner, do not direct the steam jet at washing facility, the protective wax Intermediate roof position for cleaning - components of the anti-lock brake system, coating may be impaired by dirt-dissolving see page 151. the air conditioning system, the climate additives. control system or the belt drive and its Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. components. 312 Technical Data Technical Data

Vehicle documents, identification plate...... 312 Vehicle documents, identification Information on identification plate: Vehicle identification data...... 313 plate 1 Manufacturer Coolant, brake fluid, oils ...... 313 The technical data is determined in 2 Type approval number Engine data...... 314 accordance with European Community 3 Vehicle identification number Performance...... 316 standards. We reserve the right to make 4 Permissible gross vehicle weight modifications. Specifications in the vehicle 5 Permissible gross train weight Fuel consumption, CO emissions ...... 319 2 documents always have priority over those 6 Maximum permissible front axle load Weights, payload and roof load ...... 324 given in this manual. 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load Tyres ...... 333 8 Vehicle-specific or Electrical system ...... 342 The identification plate is affixed to the front right door frame. country-specific data Capacities ...... 343 Dimensions...... 344 Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment...... 345 Technical Data 313

Coolant, brake fluid, oils When topping up – coolant, – brake fluid, – manual transmission oil, – automatic transmission oil, – power steering oil we recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can advise you on the correct products to use. Use of unsuitable fluids can cause serious damage to the vehicle. Engine oils The vehicle identification number may be Information on engine oils is found in the Vehicle identification data Service Booklet. The vehicle identification number is embossed on the instrument panel. stamped on the identification plate (see Engine code and engine number: stamped previous page) and in the vehicle floor on on left-hand side of engine on crankcase. the right-hand side under a cover between the driver’s door and seat. 314 Technical Data

Engine data Sales designation 1.4 1.6 1.8 1.8 2.0 Turbo Engine identifier code Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Number of cylinders44444 Piston displacement (cm 3) 1364 1598 1796 1796 1998 Brake horse power (kW/bhp) 66 77 92 103 125 at rpm 5600 6000 5600 6300 5200 Torque (Nm) 125 150 170 1751) 250 at rpm 4000 3900 3800 3800 1950 Type of fuel Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Octane requirement (RON)2) unleaded 953) 953) 953) 953) 953) or unleaded 983) 983) 983) 983) 983) or unleaded 913)4) 913)4) 913) 913) 913)5) Max. permissible engine speed, continuous operation (rpm) 6200 6400 6800 6800 6400 approx. Oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

1) For versions with automatic transmission 170 Nm. 2) Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228; value printed in bold: recommended fuel. 3) Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number). 4) Use of 91 RON fuel reduces power and torque. 5) If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in mountainous terrain with a caravan/trailer load or high payload. Technical Data 315

Engine data Sales designation 2.0 Turbo VXR 1.3 CDTI 1.7 CDTI 1.9 CDTI 1.9 CDTI 1.9 CDTI Engine identifier code Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Number of cylinders 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Piston displacement (cm 3) 1998 1998 1248 1686 1910 1910 1910 Brake horse power (kW/bhp) 147 177 66 74 74 88 110 at rpm 5400 5600 4000 4400 3500 3500 4000 Torque (Nm) 262 320 200 240 260 280 320 at rpm 4200 2400 to 5000 1750 to 2500 2300 1700 to 2500 2000 to 2750 2000 to 2750 Type of fuel Petrol Petrol Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Octane requirement (RON)1) unleaded 95 2) 952)3) – – – – – or unleaded 982) 98 2) – – – – – or unleaded 912)3) 912)4) – – – – – Cetane requirement (CN)1) – 49 (D)5) 49 (D)5) 49 (D)5) 49 (D)5) 49 (D)5) Max. permissible engine speed, 6400 6400 5100 to 5300 5200 5200 5200 5200 continuous operation (rpm) approx. Oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

1) Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228, Diesel DIN EN 590; D = Diesel; value printed in bold: recommended fuel. 2) Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number). 3) Use of 95 RON fuel reduces power and torque. Slight increase in fuel consumption. 4) If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in mountainous terrain with a caravan/trailer load or high payload. 5) A lower value is possible with winter diesel fuels. 316 Technical Data

Performance (approx. mph / km/h), 5-door Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 111/178 115/185 123/198 129/208 135/217 143/230 Easytronic 110/176 115/185 – – – – Automatic transmission – – 117/188 117/188 – –

Engine1) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 107/172 112/180 112/180 121/194 129/208 Easytronic 107/172 – – – – Automatic transmission – – – 117/188 –

1) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 2) The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerb weight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified maximum speed of the vehicle. Technical Data 317

Performance (approx. mph / km/h), 3-door Hatchback Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 112/180 116/187 124/200 130/210 137/220 Easytronic 111/178 187 – – – Automatic transmission – – 118/190 118/190 –

Engine1) Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 145/234 152/244 108/174 113/182 113/182 122/196 130/210 Easytronic – – 108/174 – – – – Automatic transmission – – – – – 118/190 –

Performance (approx. mph / km/h), Van Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 111/178 107/172 112/180 112/180 120/193 129/207 Easytronic – – – – – – Automatic transmission – – – – 116/187 –

1) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 2) The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerb weight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified maximum speed of the vehicle. 318 Technical Data

Performance (approx. mph / km/h), Estate Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 111/178 115/185 123/198 128/207 135/217 Easytronic – 115/185 – – – Automatic transmission – – 115/188 115/188 –

Engine1) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 107/172 112/180 112/180 120/193 129/207 Easytronic 107/172 – – – – Automatic transmission – – – 116/187 –

Performance (approx. mph / km/h), TwinTop Engine Z 16 XEP Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Z 19 DTH Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 116/186 129/209 139/224 147/237 132/213 Easytronic – – – – Automatic transmission – – – –

1) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 2) The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerb weight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified maximum speed of the vehicle. Technical Data 319

Fuel consumption, The directive is oriented to actual driving The figures given must not be taken as a practices: Urban driving is rated at approx. guarantee for the actual fuel consumption CO2 emissions 1 2 Directive 80/1268/EEC (last changed by /3 and off-road driving with approx. / 3 of a particular vehicle. 1999/100/EC) has applied for the (urban and extra-urban consumption). All values are based on the EU base model measurement of fuel consumption since Cold starts and acceleration phases are with standard equipment. also taken into consideration. 1996. The calculation of fuel consumption as The specification of CO 2 emission is also a specified by directive 1999/100/EC takes constituent of the directive. account of the vehicle’s kerb weight, ascertained in accordance with these regulations. Optional extras may result in slightly higher fuel consumption and CO 2 emission levels than those quoted. To convert l/100 km into mpg, divide 282 by number of litres/100 km. Saving fuel, protecting the environment – page 202. 320 Technical Data

1) Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km) , CO 2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 205 mm ) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8,2/ 7,7/– 8,6/ 8,5/– 10,4/–/11,4 9,9/–/10,5 extra-urban 5,2/ 4,9/– 5,4/ 5,3/– 6,1/–/ 6,3 5,8/–/6,2 total 6,3/ 5,9/– 6,6/ 6,5/– 7,7/–/ 8,2 7,3/–/7,8 CO2 151/142/– 158/156/– 185/–/197 175/–/187 Engine2) Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban –/–/– –/–/– 6,2/ 3)/– 6.4/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– extra-urban –/–/– –/–/– 4,0/ 3)/ – 4.2/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– total –/–/– –/–/– 4,8/ 3)/– 5.0/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– 3) CO2 –/–/– –/–/– 130/ /– 135/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/–

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO 2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8,4/ 7,9/– 8.8/ 8.7/– 10,6/–/11,6 10,1/–/10,7 extra-urban 5,4/ 5,1/– 5.6/ 5.5/– 6,3/–/ 6,5 6,0/–/ 6,4 total 6,5/ 6,1/– 6.8/ 6.7/– 7,9/–/ 8,4 7,5/–/ 8,0 CO2 156/146/– 163/161/– 190/–/ 202 180/–/192 Engine2) Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 12.8/–/– 13.1/–/– –/–/– 6.5/–/– 7,7/–/– 7,7/–/ 9,8 7.4/–/– extra-urban 6.8/–/– 7.1/–/– –/–/– 4.3/–/– 5,0/–/– 5,0/–/ 5,5 4.9/–/– total 9.0/–/– 9.3/–/– –/–/– 5.1/–/– 6,0/–/– 6,0/–/ 7,1 5.8/–/– CO2 216/–/– 223/–/– –/–/– 138/–/– 162/–/– 162/–/192 157/–/–

1) For Z 17 DTH engine - tyre width up to 195 mm. 2) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 3) Values not available at time of printing. Technical Data 321

1) Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km) , CO 2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 3-door (tyre width up to 205 mm ) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8,2/ 7,7/– 8,6/ 8,5/– 10,4/–/11,3 9,9/–/10,4 –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– extra-urban 5,2/ 4,9/– 5,4/ 5,3/– 6,1/–/ 6,2 5,8/–/ 6,1 –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– total 6,3/ 5,9/– 6,6/ 6,5/– 7,7/–/ 8,1 7,3/–/ 7,7 –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– CO2 151/142/– 158/156/– 185/–/194 175/–/185 –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– Engine2) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual /Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 6,2/ 3)/– 6.4/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– extra-urban 4,0/ 3)/ – 4.2/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– total 4,8/ 3)/– 5.0/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– 3) CO 2 130/ /– 135/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/–

4) Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km),CO 2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 3-door (tyre width up to 225 mm ) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8,4/ 7,9/– 8.8/ 8.7/– 10,6/–/11,5 10,1/–/10,6 12.8/–/– 13.1/–/– 13,0/–/– extra-urban 5,4/ 5,1/– 5.6/ 5.5/– 6,3/–/ 6,4 6,0/–/ 6,3 6.8/–/– 7.1/–/– 7,0/–/– total 6,5/ 6,1/– 6.8/ 6.7/– 7,9/–/ 8,3 7,5/–/ 7,9 9.0/–/– 9.3/–/– 9,2/–/– CO2 156/146/– 163/161/– 190/–/199 180/–/190 216/–/– 223/–/– 221/–/– Engine2) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban –/–/– 6.5/–/– 7,7/–/– 7,7/–/ 9,7 7.4/–/– extra-urban –/–/– 4.3/–/– 5,0/–/– 5,0/–/ 5,4 4.9/–/– total –/–/– 5.1/–/– 6,0/–/– 6,0/–/ 7,0 5.8/–/– CO 2 –/–/– 138/–/– 162/–/– 162/–/189 157/–/–

1) For Z 17 DTH engine - tyre width up to 195 mm. 2) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 3) Values not available at time of printing. 4) For Z 20 LEH engine - tyre width up to 235 mm. 322 Technical Data

1) Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km) , CO 2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 205 mm ) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8,2/–/– 8,7/ 8,6/– 10,5/–/11,4 10,0/–/10,5 –/–/– extra-urban 5,2/–/– 5,5/ 5,4/– 6,2/–/ 6,3 5,9/–/ 6,2 –/–/– total 6,3/–/– 6,7/ 6,6/– 7,8/–/ 8,2 7,4/–/ 7,8 –/–/– CO2 151/–/– 161/158/– 187/–/197 178/–/187 –/–/– Engine2) Z 20 LER Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban –/–/– 6,2/ 3)/– 6.4/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– extra-urban –/–/– 4,0/ 3)/ – 4.2/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– total –/–/– 4,8/ 3)/– 5.0/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– 3) CO2 –/–/– 130/ /– 135/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/–

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km),CO 2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8.4/–/– 8.9/ 8.8/– 10,7/–/11,6 10,2/–/10,7 12.9/–/– 13.2/–/– extra-urban 5.4/–/– 5.7/ 5.6/– 6,4/–/ 6,5 6,1/–/ 6,4 6.9/–/– 7.2/–/– total 6.5/–/– 6.9/ 6.8/– 8,0/–/ 8,4 7,6/–/ 8,0 9.1/–/– 9.4/–/– CO2 156/–/– 166/163/– 192/–/202 182/–/192 218/–/– 226/–/– Engine2) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban –/–/– 6.5/–/– 7,8/–/– 7,8/–/ 9,8 7.5/–/– extra-urban –/–/– 4.3/–/– 5,1/–/– 5,1/–/ 5,5 5.0/–/– total –/–/– 5.1/–/– 6,1/–/– 6,1/–/ 7,1 5.9/–/– CO2 –/–/– 138/–/– 165/–/– 165/–/192 159/–/–

1) For Z 17 DTH engine - tyre width up to 195 mm. 2) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 3) Values not available at time of printing. Technical Data 323

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km) , CO 2 emissions (approx. g/km) , TwinTop (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine1) Z 16 XEP Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Z 19 DTH Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 9,1/–/– 10,3/–/ 2) 13,0/–/– 13,3/–/– 7,7/–/– extra-urban 5,8/–/– 6,2/–/ 2) 7,0/–/– 7,3/–/– 5,2/–/– total 7,0/–/– 7,7/–/ 2) 9,2/–/– 9,5/–/– 6,1/–/– 2) CO 2 168/–/– 185/–/ 221/–/– 228/–/– 165/–/–

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km) , CO 2 emissions (approx. g/km), Van (tyre width up to 205 mm) Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8,0/–/– 6.2/–/– 6.4/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– extra-urban 5,0/–/– 4.0/–/– 4.2/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– total 6,1/–/– 4.8/–/– 5.0/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– CO2 146/–/– 130/–/– 135/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/–

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km) , CO 2 emissions (approx. g/km) , Van (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8,2/–/– –/–/– 6.5/–/– 7,4/–/– 7,4/–/ 9,7 7.4/–/– extra-urban 5,2/–/– –/–/– 4.3/–/– 4,9/–/– 4,9/–/ 5,4 4.9/–/– total 6,3/–/– –/–/– 5.1/–/– 5,8/–/– 5,8/–/ 7,0 5.8/–/– CO2 151/–/– –/–/– 138/–/– 157/–/– 157/–/189 157/–/– 1) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 2) Values not available at time of printing. 324 Technical Data

Weights, payload and roof load The combined total of front and rear axle Roof load The payload is the difference between the loads must not exceed the permissible The permissible roof load is 75 kg and permitted gross vehicle weight (see gross vehicle weight. For example, if the 100 kg for caravan with roof railing. The identification plate, page 312) and the EC front axle is bearing its maximum roof load is the combined weight of the kerb weight. permissible load, the rear axle can only roof rack and the load. bear a load that is equal to the gross Roof loads are not permitted on the Astra To calculate the kerb weight, enter the vehicle weight minus the front axle load. data for your vehicle below: TwinTop. z Kerb weight from With a connected trailer and full load on Driving hints – page 200. Roof racks, Table 1, the towing vehicle including all passengers, caravan and trailer towing – page 238. page 325 + ...... kg in the hatch the maximum permitted rear axle load (see rating plate or vehicle z Additional weight of documents) may be exceeded by 65 kg (5- equipment versions from door) or 70 kg (3-door), and the maximum Table 2, page 330 + ...... kg gross vehicle weight by 45 kg. In the Estate, z Weight of heavy the maximum permitted rear axle load accessories from Table 3, may be exceeded by 60 kg and the page 332 + ...... kg maximum gross vehicle weight by 30 kg. If the maximum permitted rear axle load is The total = ...... kg exceeded, a top speed of 100 km/h applies. is the EC kerb weight. If lower top speeds are stipulated Optional equipment and accessories nationally when towing a trailer these must increase the kerb weight, which means that be observed. the payload will also change slightly. See the identification plate or vehicle Note the weights given in the vehicle documents for permissible axle loads. documents. Technical Data 325

Weight (kg), Table 1, kerb weight1), Hatch 5-door Model Engine2) Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Astra Z 14 XEP 1230 1230 – Z 16 XEP 1265 1265 – Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER 1278 – 1310 Z 13 DTH 1330 3) – Z 17 DTH 1365 – – Z 19 DT 1395 – 1425 Z 19 DTH 1393 – – Astra Z 14 XEP 1250 1250 – with air conditioning Z 16 XEP 1285 1285 – system or Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER 1298 – 1330 climate control system Z 20 LEL 1385 – – Z 20 LER 1385 – – Z 13 DTH 1345 3) – Z 17 DTH 1380 – – Z 19 DT 1410 – 1440 Z 19 DTH 1408 – –

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full). 2) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 3) Values not available at time of printing. 326 Technical Data

Weight (kg), Table 1, kerb weight 1), Hatch 3-door Model Engine 2) Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Astra Z 14 XEP 1210 – – Z 16 XEP 1245 1245 – Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER 1265 – 1278 Z 13 DTH 1310 3) – Z 17 DTH 1345 – – Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL 1370 – 1393 Z 19 DTH 1390 – – Astra Z 14 XEP 1230 – – with air conditioning Z 16 XEP 1265 1265 – system or Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER 1285 – 1298 climate control system Z 20 LEL 1365 – – Z 20 LER 1365 – – Z 20 LEH 1393 – – Z 13 DTH 1325 3) – Z 17 DTH 1360 – – Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL 1385 – 1408 Z 19 DTH 1405 – –

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full). 2) Sales designation, see pages 314, 315. 3) Values not available at time of printing. Technical Data 327

Weights (kg) : Table 1, Kerb weight 1), Estate Model Engine 2) Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Astra Z 14 XEP 1280 – – Z 16 XEP 1315 1315 – Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER 1325 – 1350 Z 13 DTH 1380 3) – Z 17 DTH 1393 – – Z 19 DT 1435 – 1465 Z 19 DTH 1450 – – Astra Z 14 XEP 1300 – – with air conditioning Z 16 XEP 1335 1335 – system or Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER 1345 – 1370 climate control system Z 20 LEL 1425 – – Z 20 LER 1425 – – Z 13 DTH 1395 3) – Z 17 DTH 1408 – – Z 19 DT 1450 – 1480 Z 19 DTH 1465 – –

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full). 2) Sales designation, see pages 314, 315. 3) Values not available at time of printing. 328 Technical Data

Weights (kg) : Table 1, Kerb weight 1), Van Model Engine 2) Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Astra Z 14 XEP 1235 – – Z 13 DTH 1335 – – Z 17 DTH 1365 – – Z 19 DT 1385 – 1420 Z 19 DTL 1385 – – Z 19 DTH 1395 – – Astra Z 14 XEP 1250 – – with air conditioning Z 13 DTH 1350 – – system or Z 17 DTH 1380 – – climate control system Z 19 DT 1400 – 1435 Z 19 DTL 1400 – – Z 19 DTH 1410 – –

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full). 2) Sales designation, see pages 314, 315. Technical Data 329

Weights (kg) : Table 1, Kerb weight 1), TwinTop Model Engine 2) Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Astra Z 16 XEP 1495 – – Z 18 XER 1500 – – Z 19 DTH 1613 – – Astra Z 16 XEP 1515 – – with air conditioning Z 18 XER 1520 – – system or Z 20 LEL 1605 – – climate control system Z 20 LER 1605 – – Z 19 DTH 1628 – –

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full). 2) Sales designation, see pages 314, 315. 330 Technical Data

Weights (kg), Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions Hatch Engine1) Z 14 XEL Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Club 2.92.92.92.92.9– Design 12 12 12 12 12 12 SXi, SRi 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 12.6

Engine1) Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Club – – 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 Design – – 12 12 12 12 12 SXi, SRi 12.6 – 24.5 24.5 12.6 12.6 12.6

1) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. Technical Data 331

Weights (kg) : Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions Estate Engine1) Z 14 XEL Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Club 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 Design 12 12 12 12 12 12 SXi, SRi 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 12.6

Engine1) Z 20 LER Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Club – 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 Design– 1212121212 SXi, SRi 12.6 24.5 24.5 12.6 12.6 24.5

Weights (kg), Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions Van Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Club– ––––– Design– ––––– SXi, SRi 24.5 24.5 24.5 12.6 12.6 24.5

1) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 332 Technical Data

Weights (kg), Table 3, Heavy accessories

Accessories Sun roof Towing equipment Split rear seat bench Weight 25 (Hatch 5-door, Estate) 22 (Hatch 5-door, Estate) 10 (Hatch 5-door) 23 (Hatch 3-door) 20 (Hatch 3-door) 20 (Estate) 21 (Van) 9 (Hatch 3-door) Technical Data 333

Tyres Tyre chains 3 On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare Not all tyres available on the market Tyre chains may be used on the front wheel may have a steel rim. currently meet the structural requirements. wheels only. The spare wheel may be fitted with a 1) We recommend that you consult a We recommend the use of Vauxhall-tested smaller tyre and smaller wheel than the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning fine-mesh tyre chains that add no more wheels fitted to the vehicle. suitable tyre makes. than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the 2) These tyres have undergone special tests inboard sides (including chain lock). Tyre pressure in bar / psi The specified tyre pressures are valid for to establish their reliability, safety and Tyre chains are not permitted on cold tyres. The increased tyre pressure specific suitability for Vauxhallvehicles. temporary spare wheel 115/70 R 16 or on resulting from extensive driving must not Despite continuous market monitoring, we tyres of size 225/45 R 17, 225/40 R 18 or be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on are unable to assess these attributes for 235/35 R 19. Tyre chains are permitted on the following pages apply to both summer other tyres, even if they have been granted tyres of size 225/45 R 17 for the Astra and winter tyres. approval by the relevant authorities or in TwinTop. some other form. Always inflate the spare wheel 3 to the tyre Tyre chains are permitted on tyres size 215/ pressure for full load - see tables on Further information – page 230. 45 R 17 only if the vehicle is factory-fitted following pages. with 18" wheels. Winter tyres 3 Temporary spare wheel 3 tyre pressure - Further information – page 236. Tyres of size 215/45 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/ see tables on next page. 40 R 18 or 235/35 R 19 are not to be used In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring as winter tyres. Tyres of size 225/45 R 17 Wheels system 3 there is an adapter in the valve may be used as winter tyres on the Astra Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm. cap key. Screw adapter to valve before TwinTop. Spare wheel 3 attaching tyre pressure gauge – page 232. If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel Further information – pages 230 to 237. may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you Depending on the version, the spare wheel use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling may take the form of a temporary spare 3 may be altered. Obtain a replacement for wheel : vehicle driveability may be the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and altered by use of the spare wheel. Obtain a have the wheel balanced and fitted to the replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as vehicle. possible, and have the wheel balanced and fitted to the vehicle. Further information – page 236.

1) Country-specific version: The spare wheel is only to be used as a temporary spare wheel. 2) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. 334 Technical Data

(ctd.) Hatch Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO 2) Tyre pressure Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of loaded for full load up to 3 persons up to 3 people Engine 3) Tyres – Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 14 XEP, 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 Z 16 XEP, 195/60 R 15 Z 18 XE 195/65 R 15, 1.9/28 1.9/28 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.0/29 2.5/36 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 225/40 R 18 Z 18 XER 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 195/60 R 15 195/65 R 15, 1.9/28 1.9/28 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.0/29 2.5/36 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 Z 20 LEL 195/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 225/40 R 18 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare) 4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. 4) For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 255. Technical Data 335

(ctd.) Hatch Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO Tyre pressure Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of 2) for full load up to 3 persons loaded up to 3 people Engine 3) Tyres – Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 20 LER 195/65 R15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.6/38 2.4/35 – – 2.7/39 3.1/45 225/40 R 18 Z 20 LEH 205/50 R 17, 2.4/35 2.4/35 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 225/40 R 18, 235/35 R 19, 225/45 R 17 4) all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare) 5)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 4) To guarantee a correct speed display, the electronic speedometer must be reprogrammed. 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. 5) For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 255. 336 Technical Data

(ctd.) Hatch Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO Tyre pressure Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of 2) for full load up to 3 persons loaded up to 3 people Engine 3) Tyres – Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 13 DTH 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 195/60 R 15 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16 Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 225/40 R 18 Z 19 DTL, 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 Z 19 DT, 225/45 R 17 Z 19 DTH 215/45 R 17, 2.6/38 2.4/35 – – 2.7/39 3.1/45 225/40 R 18 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare) 4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 4) Notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 255. 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. Technical Data 337

(ctd.) Estate Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO Tyre pressure Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of 2) for full load up to 3 persons loaded up to 3 people Engine 3) Tyres – Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 14 XEP, 195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.6/38 Z 16 XEP, 205/55 R 16, Z 18 XE 225/45 R 17 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 195/60 R 15, 215/45 R 17, 225/40 R 18 Z 14 XEL, 195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.6/38 Z 18 XER 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 195/60 R 15 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare) 4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 4) For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 255. 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. 338 Technical Data

(ctd.) Estate Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO 2) Tyre pressure Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of loaded for full load up to 3 persons up to 3 people Engine 3) Tyres – Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 20 LEL 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 225/40 R 18 Z 20 LER 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 – – 2.8/41 3.1/45 225/40 R 18 Z 13 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 195/60 R 15 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare) 4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 4) 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 255. Technical Data 339

Estate Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO 2) Tyre pressure (ctd.) for load of loaded for full load Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) up to 3 persons up to 3 people Engine 3) Tyres – Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 225/40 R 18 Z 19 DTL, 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 Z 19 DT, 225/45 R 17 Z 19 DTH 215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 – – 2.8/41 3.1/45 225/40 R 18 all T 115/70 R16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare) 4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 4) 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 255. 340 Technical Data

(ctd.) Van Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO 2) Tyre pressure Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of loaded for full load up to 2 persons up to 2 people Engine 3) Tyres – Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 14 XEP 195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.6/38 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 195/60 R 15, 215/45 R 17, 225/40 R 18 Z 13 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 195/60 R 15 Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 225/40 R 18 Z 19 DTL, 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 Z 19 DT, 225/45 R 17 Z 19 DTH 215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 – – 2.8/41 3.1/45 225/40 R 18 all T 115/70 R16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare) 4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 4) For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 255. 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. Technical Data 341

(ctd.) TwinTop Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO Tyre pressure Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of 2) for full load up to 3 persons loaded up to 3 people Engine 3) Tyres – Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 16 XEP, 205/55 R 16, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2,2/32 2.6/38 Z 18 XER 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.4/35 2.8/41 Z 20 LEL 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.4/35 2.8/41 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 Z 20 LER 205/55 R 16, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 2.6/38 2.4/35 – – 2.7/39 3.1/45 Z 19 DTH 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.4/35 2.8/41 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare) 4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 4) For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 255. 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. 342 Technical Data

Electrical system

Battery Voltage 12 Volt Amp hours 36 Ah / 44 Ah 3 / 55 Ah 3 / 60 Ah 3 / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 Battery for radio remote control of central locking system and CR 20 32 electronic key of Open&Start system Technical Data 343

Capacities (approx. litre) Engine1) Z 14 XEL Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Fuel tank (nominal content) 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 Engine oil with filter change 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.25 4.25 between MIN and MAX on dipstick 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wash 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 systemwith headlight wash system 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

1) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. Capacities (approx. litre) Engine1) Z 20 LEH Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Fuel tank (nominal content) 52 52 52 52 52 52 Engine oil with filter change 5.0 3.2 5.0 4,3 4,3 4,3 between MIN and MAX on dipstick 1.0 1.0 1.0 0,7 0,7 0,7 Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wash 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 systemwith headlight wash system 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

1) Sales designation – see pages 314, 315. 344 Technical Data

Dimensions (approx. mm) Hatch 5-door Hatch 3-door Estate Van TwinTop Overall length 4249 4290 4515 4515 4476 Width 1753 1753 1753 1753 1759 Width with two exterior mirrors 2033 2033 2033 2033 2039 Overall height 1460 1435 1500 1500 1411 2614 2614 2703 2703 2614 Turning circle diameter1) 11.20 11.20 11.50 11.50 11.20

1) In metres. Technical Data 345

Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment with detachable coupling ball bar, Hatch1) All dimensions refer to factory-fitted towing equipment. Dimension mm A 342.9 B 83 C 513.4 D 488.6 E 211.4 F 94.3 G 160

9 Warning

Only use towing equipment approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retrofitting of towing equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

1) Do not mount towing equipment to vehicles with Z 20 LEH engine. Sales designation – page 314. 346 Technical Data

Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment with detachable coupling ball bar, Estate, Van All dimensions refer to factory-fitted towing equipment. Dimension mm A 84.0 B 570.0 C 515.0 D 93.5 E 173.0 F 307.6 G 158.0 H 292.6

9 Warning

Only use towing equipment approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retrofitting of towing equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Technical Data 347

Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment with detachable coupling ball bar, Astra TwinTop All measurements refer to Vauxhall- approved towing equipment. Dimension mm A 68,8 B 570.0 C 515.0 D 485,0 E 93.5 F 288,0 G 245,0

9 Warning

Only use towing equipment approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retrofitting of towing equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 348 Technical Data Index 349

Fault ...... 190, 198 C Index Interruption of power supply.. 191, 199 Capacities ...... 343 Kickdown ...... 189, 196 A Car Pass...... 2, 66 manual mode...... 194 Caravan/trailer towing ...... 200, 238 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ...... 228 Selector lever..... 20, 21, 187, 193, 194 Care...... 308 Accessories ...... 130, 135, 252 Winter programme ...... 189, 196 Cargo box ...... 103 Accessory socket ...... 107 Automatic wiping...... 17 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) ..... 139 Catalytic converter...... 207, 211, 247 Driving abroad...... 142 B CDC Air conditioning system ...... 157, 164 Battery ...... 201, 306, 342 (Continuous Damping Control)... 39, 214 Air intake...... 177 Interruption of Central locking system ...... 76 Air quality sensor...... 172 power supply ...... 145, 185, 191, 199 Changing the battery Air recirculation system .... 164, 168, 176 Battery discharge protection ...... 142 Radio remote control ...... 69, 75, 342 Air vents...... 159 Before starting off ...... 22 Changing tyre/wheel type ...... 230 Alarm system...... 83 Belt force limiters...... 112 Changing wheels ...... 257 Alternator...... 39 Belt tensioners...... 113 Chassis number, Antenna...... 64, 309 Bleeding, diesel fuel system...... 247 see vehicle identification number..... 313 Antifreeze...... 300 Board information display ...... 46 Check control ...... 30, 62 Antifreeze protection ...... 300, 305 Bonnet ...... 86 Child restraint system ...... 130, 135 Anti-knock quality of fuel ...... 204 Boot, see Luggage compartment .. 81, 91 Child safety locks...... 86, 144 Octane number ...... 314, 315 Brake assist ...... 226 Cigarette lighter ...... 107, 142 Anti-theft locking system ...... 77 Brake light...... 226 Climate control ...... 157 Towing equipment ...... 241 Brake system ...... 38 Climate control system ...... 158, 171 Anti-theft protection ...... 24 Brakes...... 226 Clock...... 44 Aquaplaning ...... 234 ABS ...... 228 Clutch operation...... 201 Armrest...... 90, 91, 110 Brake assist ...... 226 CO2 emissions ...... 319 Ashtray ...... 108, 142 Brake fluid...... 302 Code numbers ...... 2 Automatic Brake lights...... 282 Cold start ...... 201 Anti-dazzle interior mirror ...... 134 Brake lights...... 288 Colour information display ...... 46 Automatic air recirculation mode 172, 176 Brake servo unit ...... 200 Continuous Damping Control ...... 39, 214 Automatic transmission . 20, 21, 186, 192 Foot brake...... 226 Continuous Damping Control automatic mode ...... 187, 193 Hand brake ...... 227 (CDC)...... 39, 214 Control indicator...... 188, 195 Bulb replacement ...... 272, 274 Contrast...... 57 Driving programme ...... 188, 195 Bulbs ...... 135, 272, 274 350 Index

Control indicator D Kickdown...... 182 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ...... 229 Selector lever ...... 20 Dashboard, see Instrument panel ...... 7 Airbag ...... 123, 132 Starting off...... 180 Data...... 66, 312 Engine electronics ...... 210 Winter programme...... 182 Date ...... 48, 51 Exhaust ...... 209 Economical driving...... 200, 202 Daytime running lights...... 136 Immobiliser ...... 67 Electric sun roof...... 146 Decommissioning ...... 307 Parking distance sensor ...... 219 Electric windows ...... 143 Deflation detection system ...... 32, 221 Transmission ...... 188, 195 Electrical system...... 306, 342 Deflation Detection System (DDS) ..... 221 Tyre pressure monitoring system ... 224 Electro-hydraulic Demisting and defrosting Control indicators ...... 10, 37 power assisted steering...... 200 Windows ...... 163 Adaptive Forward Lighting...... 42 Electro-hydraulic with climate control system ...... 174 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) .. 139 power-assisted steering With air conditioning ...... 166, 170 Belt tensioners...... 113 fluid ...... 313 Diesel fuel filter ...... 300 Brake system ...... 228 Electronic components ...... 306 Diesel fuel system...... 247, 300 Cruise control...... 216 Electronic immobiliser ...... 67 Diesel particle filter ...... 42, 160, 201 DDS ...... 221 Electronic Stability Program...... 212 Dipped beam...... 15, 136 Deflation detection system ...... 221 Engine code ...... 313, 314, 315 Bulb replacement ...... 275 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .. 212 Engine control indicator...... 210 Display...... 45, 46 IDS+ ...... 214, 215 Engine oil ...... 298 Display mode ...... 58 Coolant...... 300 Engine oil change ...... 299 Door handle lighting ...... 142 Coolant level ...... 301 Engine oil consumption ...... 298 Door locks ...... 66, 311 Coolant temperature ...... 39 Engine oil filter ...... 299 Doors...... 39 Cooled glove compartment ...... 159 Engine oil level ...... 40, 298 Door-to-door lighting ...... 140 Cooling ...... 165, 170 Engine oil pressure ...... 37 Driving abroad ...... 204, 294 Correcting time ...... 50, 56 Engine speed...... 201 Headlights...... 142 Coupling socket load ...... 244 Engine wash...... 311 Driving hints ...... 200 Courtesy light ...... 141 Entry lighting ...... 142 Courtesy lights E Environmental protection...... 299, 308 Bulb replacement...... 292 ESP (Electronic Stability Program)...... 212 Easy Load ...... 104 Cruise control ...... 216 Exhaust control indicator ...... 209 Easytronic ...... 20, 178 Curtain airbags ...... 122 Exhaust gases...... 210 Driving programmes ...... 181 Curve lighting ...... 33, 139 Exhaust system ...... 210 fault ...... 184 Exterior mirrors ...... 6, 134, 160 Interruption of power supply...... 185 Index 351

F G Heating ...... 157, 162 Seats ...... 160 Fan ...... 3, 161, 297 Gears...... 20 with climate control system...... 173 Filling station Generator, see Alternator ...... 39 with the air Capacities...... 343 Genuine Vauxhall conditioning system...... 166, 170 Engine oil level ...... 298 Parts and Accessories ...... 26 Height adjustment Fuel...... 204, 314, 315 Glasses compartment...... 110 seat belts...... 115 Ignition key ...... 2 Glove compartment ...... 110 Steering wheel ...... 7 Opening the bonnet ...... 86 Glove compartment lighting...... 142 High-pressure cleaners..... 242, 310, 311 Tyre pressure ...... 203, 333 Bulb replacement ...... 293 Hill Start Assist ...... 227 Vehicle data ...... 313 Graphical information display...... 46 Horn ...... 16 Windscreen wash system ...... 305 Gross vehicle weight...... 324 First-aid kit (cushion) ...... 135, 252 I H Flat tyre ...... 261 Identification plate...... 312 Halogen headlight system FlexOrganizer ...... 102 IDS+ (Interactive Driving System) 212, 214 Driving abroad ...... 142 Fog lights ...... 137 Ignition logic ...... 51, 58 Halogen headlight system ...... 274 Fog lights Ignition system...... 297, 306 Bulb replacement ...... 274 Bulb replacement...... 281 Immobiliser ...... 67 Hand brake ...... 23, 24, 227 Fog tail light...... 137 Information display ...... 46 Hazard warning lights ...... 16, 134 Bulb replacement...... 282, 288 Infotainment system...... 65 Head restraints...... 28, 88, 135 Folding roof, see TwinTop ...... 148 Inspection system ...... 296 Headlight flash...... 15 Foot brake ...... 226 Instrument display ...... 43 Headlight range adjustment ...... 138 Front passenger airbag ...... 118 Instrument illumination...... 140 Headlight switch ...... 14, 136, 137 Fuel ...... 204, 205, 314, 315 Bulb replacement...... 293 Headlight wash system ...... 18, 305 Fuel consumption ...... 202, 204, 319 Instrument panel ...... 7 Headlights ...... 14 Fuel filler cap...... 205 Instruments ...... 36 Daytime running lights...... 136 Fuel filter ...... 300 Interactive Driving System (IDS+) 212, 214 Driving abroad ...... 142 Fuel gauge ...... 43 Interior mirror ...... 6 Fog lights ...... 137 Fuel level ...... 43 Interruption of power supply. 60, 63, 145 Warning device...... 23 Fuel system, diesel ...... 247 Easytronic...... 185 Headlight range adjustment ...... 274 Fuse extractor...... 266 Electric windows ...... 145 Heated exterior mirrors...... 18, 160 Fuses...... 264 Selector lever lock ...... 191, 199 Heated front seats...... 160 ISOFIX ...... 129 Heated rear window ...... 18, 160 352 Index

J Safety net...... 99, 101 O Luggage compartment cover ...... 98 Jack ...... 256 Octane numbers...... 204, 314 Lumbar support...... 4 Jump leads ...... 248 Oil change ...... 299 M Oil consumption ...... 298 K Main beam...... 15, 136 Oil filter change...... 299 Key Bulb replacement ...... 276, 278 Oil level...... 298 extending ...... 66 Control indicator ...... 41 Oil pressure...... 37 ignition lock...... 14 Maintenance...... 26, 296 Oils ...... 298 Locking doors ...... 76 Air conditioning system...... 177 Open&Start system ...... 22, 31, 36, 70 Remove...... 24 Antifreeze protection...... 300 Operating temperature ...... 201 Starting the engine...... 14, 22 Brake fluid...... 302 Outside temperature gauge ...... 47 Key numbers ...... 2 Brakes ...... 226 Overrun ...... 201, 203 Keys...... 66 Catalytic converter ...... 211 P Engine oil ...... 298, 299 L Paintwork damage...... 310 Fuel consumption ...... 203 Language selection ...... 51, 56 Panoramic windscreen ...... 34, 146 Tyre pressure ...... 232 Lashing eyes ...... 103 Parking ...... 24, 218 Tyres...... 233, 234 Leather trim ...... 310 Parking distance sensor...... 218 Windscreen wipers...... 303 Level control system ...... 220 Parking lights ...... 14, 140 Manual transmission, see Transmission 20 Light switch...... 14 Parking lights Mirrors ...... 6, 134 Lighting ...... 14, 40, 136 Bulb replacement...... 277, 280 Misted windows ...... 163, 174 Driving abroad...... 142 Parking the vehicle...... 24 Mobile telephone ...... 65 Loading ...... 243, 322, 323 Parts ...... 26, 135 Motorway lighting ...... 33, 139 Locking doors ...... 2, 76 Pedals ...... 201 Muffler, see Exhaust system ...... 210 Locking from the inside ...... 78 Performance ...... 319 Locks...... 311 N Petrol ...... 204, 314, 315 Lubricants ...... 298, 313 Neutral, transmission ...... 20 Pinking ...... 204 Luggage compartment Number plate lighting ...... 291 Pollen filter...... 177 Bulb replacement...... 293 Number plate lights Power assisted steering, see electro-hy- FlexOrganizer ...... 102 Bulb replacement ...... 291 draulic power assisted steering ...... 200 Lighting ...... 142 Number plates ...... 307 Power steering, see electro-hydraulic pow- Loading ...... 106, 243, 324 er assisted steering ...... 200 Locking ...... 81 Preheating...... 22, 42 Index 353

Preheating switch ...... 22 S Fuel consumption ...... 202, 203 Puddle light...... 142 Speedometer...... 43 Safeguard Pushing, towing...... 247 Sport mode ...... 39 against unauthorised use...... 2, 14, 25 Sport programme ...... 32, 214 Safety ...... 111 Q Starter switch...... 14 Safety accessories ...... 130, 135, 252 Quickheat...... 162, 169, 173 Starting the engine ...... 14, 67, 179, 247 Safety net ...... 99, 101 Self-help...... 247 Safety systems ...... 111 R Steam-jet cleaners ...... 242, 310, 311 Saving energy ...... 202 Radio ...... 64 Steering column lock...... 14, 24 Seat adjustment...... 3 Radio equipment (CB)...... 65 Steering wheel adjustment ...... 7 Seat belts...... 115, 310 Radio reception...... 64 Steering wheel remote control ...... 30, 64 Seat height adjustment...... 4 Radio remote control Stowage compartments ...... 110 Seat occupancy recognition ...... 124 Central locking system ... 2, 31, 68, 71 Sun roof ...... 146 Seat position...... 87 Rain sensor ...... 17, 303 Sun visors ...... 34, 142, 146 Seats ...... 3, 4 Reading lights...... 141 Sunblind...... 147 heated ...... 160 Rear light cluster...... 136 System settings ...... 50, 55 Bulb replacement...... 282, 288 Selector lever ...... 179, 187, 193 Rear window wash system... 18, 305, 309 Selector lever lock...... 20, 21, 187, 193 T Refuelling ...... 205 Self-diagnosis...... 113, 123, 229 Tables ...... 110 Fuel filler cap ...... 206 Self-help ...... 247 Tachometer ...... 43 Remote control Automatic transmission...... 191 Tail lights ...... 136 Central locking system ... 2, 31, 68, 71 Electric sun roof ...... 147 Bulb replacement...... 282 Steering wheel...... 30, 64 Electric windows...... 145 Tail lights Replacement keys...... 66 Information display...... 48 Bulb replacement...... 288 Reversing lights Radio remote control...... 69, 75 Tailgate ...... 81 Bulb replacement...... 282, 288 Service Booklet ...... 26 Tank Rollover protection system ...... 152 Service interval display ...... 296 Fuel gauge...... 43 Roof lining ...... 34, 146 Service work...... 26, 296 Technical data...... 312 Roof load ...... 106, 200, 203, 322, 323 Side airbags ...... 120 Telephone, see Mobile telephone ...... 65 Roof rack...... 203, 238, 324 Signal system ...... 15, 16 Temperature regulation ...... 161, 173 Roof racks ...... 203, 238, 324 Spare fuses...... 265 Tempomat, see cruise control ...... 216 Run-flat tyres...... 235 Spare keys...... 66 Temporary spare wheel...... 237, 255 Running-in ...... 200 Spare wheel...... 254, 255, 257 The first 600 miles/1000 km ...... 200 Brakes ...... 226 Speed ...... 202, 203 Tightening torque ...... 260, 333 354 Index

Tilt angle Twin Audio ...... 31, 64 seats ...... 4 TwinTop ...... 148 W Time...... 48, 51 Closing the roof ...... 149 Warning buzzers ...... 23 Tools ...... 256 Opening the roof...... 149 Warning messages...... 49, 54, 55 Towing ...... 249 Rollover protection...... 152 Warning triangle ...... 135, 252 Towing equipment ...... 239 Warning buzzers ...... 150 Wash fluid reservoir, windscreen Towing eye ...... 249, 251 Wind deflector...... 154 wash system ...... 305 Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) ...... 244 Tyre chains...... 236, 333 Weights ...... 322, 323 Transmission display... 45, 178, 186, 193 Tyre condition ...... 233 Wheels...... 230 Transmission, automatic 20, 21, 186, 192 Tyre pressure ...... 32, 222, 232, 333 Wheels, tyres ...... 230 automatic mode ...... 187, 193 Tyre pressure monitoring system ...... 222 Wind deflector ...... 154 Driving programme ...... 188, 195 Tyre repair kit...... 261 Windows Fault ...... 190, 198 Demisting and defrosting..... 163, 166, Interruption of power supply .. 191, 199 U 170, 174 Kickdown...... 189, 196 Units of measure...... 51, 57 Windscreen wash system ...... 18 Selector lever ...... 20, 187, 193, 194 Unleaded fuel ...... 204, 207, 314 Antifreeze protection ...... 305 Selector lever lock ...... 20 Used oil ...... 299 Capacities...... 343 Winter programme ...... 189, 196 Wash fluid reservoir...... 305 Transmission, Easytronic...... 178 V Windscreen wipers ...... 17, 303 Driving programmes ...... 181 Valve cap key ...... 232, 333 Winter mode fault ...... 184 Vauxhall alarm system ...... 83 Starting-off aid ...... 182 Interruption of power supply ...... 185 Vauxhall Service ...... 26, 294 Winter operation Kickdown...... 182 Vehicle care...... 308 Battery...... 201 Selector lever ...... 20, 180 Vehicle decommissioning ...... 307 Coolant, antifreeze...... 300 Winter programme ...... 182 Vehicle identification number ...... 313 Fuel consumption ...... 203 Transmission, manual ...... 20 Vehicle keys, see Keys ...... 66 Fuel for diesel engines...... 205 Tread depth ...... 234 Vehicle recommissioning ...... 307 Heating...... 157, 166, 170 Trip computer ...... 30, 52, 58 Vehicle tools ...... 256 Locks...... 311 Trip odometer...... 44 Ventilation ...... 157, 162, 169, 175 Tyre chains ...... 236, 333 Triple information display ...... 46 Window demisting and defrosting .. 163 TSA (Trailer Stability Assist) ...... 244 Windscreen wash system, Turn signal lights ...... 15 antifreeze protection ...... 305 Turn signals Winter programme...... 182, 189, 196 Bulb replacement...... 281, 282, 288 Winter tyres...... 236, 333 Index 355

X Xenon headlight system Driving abroad...... 142 Xenon headlight system ...... 278 Bulb replacement...... 278 Owner’s Manual Owner’s and Maintenance Safety Operation, ASTRA

ASTRA TS 1612-A-07 ©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England. Ltd., ©Copyright Motors Vauxhall by or Reproduction or in whole translation, in parts, is not withoutpermitted prior consent written Motors Vauxhall from Ltd. under rights as understood All the copyright explicitly are laws Ltd. Motors Vauxhall reserved by and specifications contained in this illustrations information, All based on the latest are manual information production atavailable the time of publication. The right changes at make is reserved to time without any notice. July Edition: 2006.